Open Collections

UBC Theses and Dissertations

UBC Theses Logo

UBC Theses and Dissertations

Art education in schools and galleries : a case study of a suburban art gallery’s educational program 1983

You don't seem to have a PDF reader installed, try download the pdf

Item Metadata

Download

Media
UBC_1983_A8 S84.pdf [ 18.95MB ]
Metadata
JSON: 1.0055114.json
JSON-LD: 1.0055114+ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): 1.0055114.xml
RDF/JSON: 1.0055114+rdf.json
Turtle: 1.0055114+rdf-turtle.txt
N-Triples: 1.0055114+rdf-ntriples.txt
Citation
1.0055114.ris

Full Text

ART EDUCATION IN SCHOOLS AND GALLERIES: A CASE STUDY OF A SUBURBAN ART GALLERY'S EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM by VIRGINIA STEPHEN B.A., B.Ed., Queen's University, 1974 A THESIS SUBMITTED IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF ARTS in THE FACULTY OF GRADUATE STUDIES Department of Visual and Performing Arts in Education Faculty of Education We accept this thesis as conforming to the required standard THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA April 1983 © Virginia Stephen 1983 In p r e s e n t i n g t h i s t h e s i s i n p a r t i a l f u l f i l m e n t of the requirements f o r an advanced degree a t the U n i v e r s i t y o f B r i t i s h Columbia, I agree t h a t the L i b r a r y s h a l l make i t f r e e l y a v a i l a b l e f o r r e f e r e n c e and study. I f u r t h e r agree t h a t p e r m i s s i o n f o r e x t e n s i v e copying of t h i s t h e s i s f o r s c h o l a r l y purposes may be granted by the head o f my department or by h i s or her r e p r e s e n t a t i v e s . I t i s understood t h a t copying o r p u b l i c a t i o n o f t h i s t h e s i s f o r f i n a n c i a l g a i n s h a l l not be allowed without my w r i t t e n p e r m i s s i o n . Department of j & C ^ ^ ^ u ^ E ? t&cn/r*i -~^!bJ^ ^Ol(ccC<p/y The U n i v e r s i t y of B r i t i s h Columbia 1956 Main Mall Vancouver, Canada V6T 1Y3 (3/81) i i ABSTRACT Almost all public art galleries, large and small, plan for the use of the gallery by school classes. In this manner, the gallery takes on the role of art educator, a role shared with most elementary school teachers. This shared responsibility implies a partnership between gal- lery educators and teachers, whereby each partner shares expertise and resources with the other. In this case study two workshop packages, in- cluding pre-visit and in-gallery materials, for grades three through six, were developed and evaluated. It became evident that while gallery pro- grams can be designed to provide a good experience for children as well as professional development for teachers, there may be a lack of communi- cation between galleries and schools. This impedes the potential success of gallery based art educational programs. i i i TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ABSTRACT ii TABLE OF CONTENTS 111 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS v Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION 1 2. EDUCATION AS A MANDATE FOR MUSEUMS AND ART GALLERIES 7 Review of Literature A Survey of Vancouver Area Museum Educators 3. THE SURREY SITUATION 28 The Surrey Art Gallery Staff Assessment of the Community and the Gallery's Role in the Community A Survey of Surrey Teachers' Attitudes Towards Gallery Education 4. THE CASE STUDY: THE DEVELOPMENT OF TWO WORKSHOP PROGRAMS '.. 52 The Initiation of a Case Study of the Surrey Art Gallery Educational Program The Programs 5. TESTING AND EVALUATION 72 Testing and Evaluating the Program A Follow-up Study 6. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 95 REFERENCE NOTES 103 REFERENCES 105 APPENDIXES 110 i v 1. Museum Educators' Questionnaire 1 1 0 2. Gallery Education Poster for the Surrey 1 1 5 Art Gallery 3 . The Initial Teacher Survey 1 1 ? 4 . The Second Teacher Survey 1 2 1 5. The Inuit Pre-visit Preparation Kit 1 2 5 6. The Inuit Workshop Presentation Kit 148 7 . Inuit Workshop Follow-up Ideas 1 9 0 8 . The Seeing Ourselves Through Art Pre-visit 1 9 6 Preparation Kit 9 . The Seeing Ourselves Through Art Workshop 2 2 3 Text 10. The Seeing Ourselves Through Art Workshop 249 Follow-up Ideas 11. Samples of Children's "Thank you" Letters 2 5 1 12. Teacher Evaluation of the Pre-visit Preparation Kits 2 5 5 13. Teacher Evaluation of the Workshops (in-gallery^o 14. Instructor's Evaluation of the Inuit Workshop 2 6 3 15. Photographs of the Children and Their Work 2 6 6 16. Follow-up Study Letter to the Teachers 2 6 9 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I would like to thank the staff of the Surrey Art Gallery, in pa tieular Ingrid Kolt, the Education and Events Coordinator, for giving the opportunity to undertake this study. 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The study of visual art has been a part of the curriculum in the public school system since 1875. How important it has been in the cur- riculum has varied throughout the past decades. The British Columbia Public Schools' Report of 1875 advocates an art program of 'drawing' for all students. Drawing is, according to John Jessop the writer of the report, a necessary tool for all students to have, no matter what their future vocations may be. At various times, art studies have been option- al or obligatory. Programs were usually concerned with the acquisition of fine art skills. In the 1950's and 1960's particularly, the influence of Victor Lowenfeld and contemporary trends in the art world resulted in many art courses that were very strong in studio activity but often lack- ing in the historic, critical component of art study. Lowenfeld's great contribution was in providing an opportunity for self expression. Art in his view, was an outlet for individual thoughts and feelings. The newly proposed Art 8-12 curriculum guide and resource book for British Columbia High Schools promotes both the development of studio skills and the gen- eral aesthetic education of students (Note 1). To supplement art programs, the annual visit to the local art gal- lery (Note 2) is popular. As galleries realize the importance of serving the school audience, they have taken on the role of art educators. They have planned events and programs that take them into the realm of being partners with the schools in this business of 'art education' for chil- dren. How well does this partnership work? Are there gains to be made by both partners? Is there a true sharing between the schools and art gal- 2 leries? Is the supposed partnership being used to its fullest? That is, is the expertise of the school teachers and the gallery staff being uti- lized to provide the best possible experience for all involved? Do gal- lery staff learn from teachers and teachers from gallery staff, or are the children, if in fact they do learn anything, the only learners? These questions have led to an examination of the literature in the field of gallery education. Because this field is only now gaining at- tention through gallery educators' association with the National Associa- tion of Education in Art and the formation of its own networks, litera- ture has been obscure in the past. Much has been published in the United States in the last eight years but very little Canadian work has appeared until very recently. The literature not only provides a background to the development of education programs in galleries, but also describes programs in use in various settings and suggests future directions for gallery educators to explore. From this examination the study was nar- rowed to the Lower Mainland area of British Columbia and the educational programming of a suburban art gallery, the Surrey Art Gallery, in order that it be a manageable focus. The preparation and examination of two themes/subjects in their workshop program offered the opportunity to evaluate how well an art gallery can serve its local schools. As an introduction to this study, I would like to recount how, as a teacher with an art history background, I became concerned about the art education my students received, both in my class and on excursions to art galleries. Every fall from 1975 to 1980, I contacted the Art Gallery of Ontario Education Department and set up an appointment to visit the gallery with my art students from Loyalist Collegiate and Vocational Institute in 3 Kingston, Ontario. This set into motion the often chaotic process of arranging the trip to Toronto—applying for school and School Board approval for the trip, booking transportation, writing parent approval letters and subsequently retrieving the signed permission forms and fees from the students before boarding the bus, deciding how to select the forty students (the maximum number per school that the gallery would accommodate) from some two hundred and fifty, planning other events for the day in Toronto, preparing the students for the gallery experience as well as the visit to the 'big' city, and arranging for supervision of the classes left behind at the school. The same process had to be repeated for several trips per year to the local public art gallery, the Agnes Etherington Art Centre, and the annual grade 13 expedition to New York City. After going through this process a number of times, and often won- dering "why" when the inevitable problems arose, two things became evi- dent. The first was the wide variety of programs, or lack of programs, the art galleries offered for school groups, and, the difference in the galleries' attitudes towards the students and their teachers. At the Art Gallery of Ontario, we were led through the exciting classroom introduc- tion tour program where the students were encouraged to participate in discussion led by informed and energetic instructors. At some galleries, we were encouraged to look around on our own, and, at others, the sixteen to eighteen year old students were told that they could not look at the exhibitions without a guide. We were complimented on the level of our discussion at some galleries and told we asked too many questions at others. I was told once that the guide didn't care what background the students had in the subject of the exhibition (more than she, as it 4 turned out) or what we wanted to see most because it would fit into our classroom studies. She was going to give us her prepared talk and we were to listen, not to ask questions and were not allowed to stay in the gallery for our own studies after the tour. As it turned out, this guide had not been with the gallery long and was not yet confident about her ability to present the exhibition or to stretch gallery rules. Some gal- lery staff were very pleased to help the students with assignments they had been given to prepare on their own (i.e. gallery reviews and inter- views at local galleries, specific studies at other galleries). Others were not accommodating, perhaps because of constraints on their time from gallery duties and other school groups. A staff member at the Agnes Etherington Art Centre said that sometimes gallery staff may refrain from helping students with assignments for fear of doing the students' home- work for him. Once I was told I probably didn't know enough to take my students on my own tour. Elsewhere I was encouraged to do so. The second observation was that I seemed to be one of the few art teachers that I had contact with who frequently went through the 'ordeal' of gallery field trips. The reasons were many—it was too complicated to arrange the trips and the effort was not worth the return, the students didn't get much out of the trips, the students didn't want to go. Most limited trips to one a year rather than using galleries as a regular resource for their program. An unfortunate aspect of many of the 'art' programs at the schools of these teachers (largely secondary and senior public teaching grades seven and eight) seemed to be that the art history and art appreciation aspects of the program was this annual gallery field trip, perhaps supplemented with a week or so of art history slides. These were all teachers with university art training, but it became evi- 5 dent, this art training rarely included more than an art history survey course along with the many studio courses. These were the teachers in the system with the most art background and their programs were all but ignoring one of the most important components, the critical and historic components, of a good art education program. If this were the case, what was happening in elementary school classes where the teachers had l itt le , i f any, art training? How did they use gallery programs? Did they use the available programs at all? Within the school system these problems may be approached by the preparation of good curriculum materials for the teachers to use, work- shops, and, improved art, education in the institutions which train teach- ers. These changes, however, will be slow to implement and slow to take effect, especially now that declining enrollment, budget cuts and calls for added emphasis on the 'basics' affect the schools. What other avenues then are available to improve the quality of art education for our children? The obvious answer is the gallery, but do the galleries offer programs that are helpful and, do these programs have the most realistic and appropriate focus? It would appear from casual observation that many of the galleries deem it sufficient to address only the children, undoubtedly the main concern of all of us, while ignoring the rest of the school group—the teacher. Gallery programs tend to intimidate the 'non art background' teacher with a dazzling display of activities that use equipment, materials and resources that are not available for the teacher in her classroom thus discouraging her from attempting to approach art topics, or, alternatively, they may bore and discourage her, and her students, with a passive, 'walk and gawk' 6 (0tt,1977,p.l7) tour. This, of course, is not true of all gallery educa- tion programs but is true of a discouraging number. As will become evident from the review of the literature in the field of gallery education, galleries consider themselves to be an educa- tion institution because of their very mandate to exhibit art for the public to view and assess. They offer programs to the public and to schools to assist people to learn to 'look' and to assess in order to have the fullest experience of the work on exhibition. All are concerned with helping the public make art a part of their daily existence. For art to become a part of the daily existence of the school room, teachers need some help. Who is better to give it than the gallery staff with all of the expertise available to them as well as their collection and exhi- bitions. 7 CHAPTER 2 EDUCATION AS A MANDATE FOR MUSEUMS AND ART GALLERIES Review of Literature "It is almost.impossible to exaggerate the importance of art teach- ing for the diffusion of culture" (Cox,1913,p.49). This statement is included in Newson and Silvers, The Art Museum as Educator, a collection of writings and descriptions of exemplary programs that has become the text in the field of gallery education. Although this statement is one that we hear often today in art education circles, it was in fact made in 1913 by K. Cox in an address to the New York City teachers at the Metro- politan Museum of Art. Mr. Cox lamented the fact that at most schools, trade skills connected with art were taught rather than art itself. What was neglected was teaching 'about' art. Lamentably the same criticism could be made of most school art pro- grams today. Most schools offer students art programs that are based on the production of art. The teachers, if they have any art training, are usually trained in studio pursuits and have little knowledge or back- ground in art history, aesthetics, criticism or culturally based studies such as sociology or cultural anthropology. Most of us do not go as far as Vincent Lanier who purports to advocate eliminating studio activities from art programs in order to build a new curriculum based on the devel- opment of aesthetic literacy (Lanier,!980,p.l9). We do, however, agree that we are neglecting a very important facet of art education. The pro- blem is: how do teachers introduce the non-production facets of art study into their programs? It would seem that in order to do this the teacher needs a lot of help. The inadequacies of training have been mentioned. In addition, we 8 are faced with staff cuts that will result in teachers being faced with larger classes and more diversified teaching duties, especially in the elementary schools which will probably lose the services of such special- ists on staff as the art teacher. These cuts will also rob the profes- sion of some of the young, better trained teachers and place teachers with no art background in front of art classes. Severe budget cuts will take funds for visual aids, in-service training, and other teaching aids away from the teachers. In addition," we must face the fact that as a group, art educators have not, for the most part, been able to convince legislators and administrators of the values that we know are inherent in good art education programs. As a result, in these difficult times, we will have trouble getting administrators' support for changed art pro- grams, if in fact we save the programs at all in the push towards 'the basics'. A pessimistic picture? Unfortunately yes, but we may be overlooking an important source of help in our dilemma—the museum. Cox's 1913 ad- dress pointed out that to teach art we must show students 'the real thing'. Of course, today's technology provides us with much better re- productions than those available to teachers in 1913, but it is amazing how many children still pass through art classes without having ever seen 'the real thing'. Robert Ott says that 'Partnership between society institutions for education are enhancing the unique role of museum education' (Ott,1981, p. 15). That a museum or an art gallery is an education institution may be debated by some. To most its primary function is the collection, pre- servation and display of, in the case of art galleries, significant art works. It is, in a sense, a repository for work that someone decided was 9 'good art 1 . However, a brief survey of the history of the art museum in North America will show that an art museum is also an education institu- tion and that many of its philosophies are the same as those of a good school art program. Museums as we know them are still young. Even in Europe their his- tory is but two hundred years old. Throughout that history, education has been seen by museum organizers as a major role of museums. For ex- ample, the collection of the Louvre was arranged according to historical principles so that the museum may serve the public by giving access to all to the greatest works of art as well as 'for the inculcation of poli- tical and social virtue' (Silver,1978). The Metropolitan Museum of Art had an educational program as early as 1872. Most museums saw that they could contribute to the lives of all citizens by showing them art that would 'educate, humanize and refine a practical and laborious people' (Silver,1980,p.l3). Of course, there is a certain amount of elitism in these lofty theories, but the idea is valid. In the late nineteenth century, there was a great push among the general population to educate themselves. Education for children was not yet compulsory and many adults who had been forced to leave school very early in order to earn a living, saw a need for more education as they strove for success in business and society. They found sources of that education in books and in art. Like books, art was seen to be a social document. Reading clubs, libraries, scholarly clubs and societies became popular vehicles for the exchange of ideas, and in 1880 there was a peti- tion in New York to open the Metropolitan Museum on Sundays so that those who worked could attend on their day off. The vast network of adult edu- cation we have today did not exist for these people, but, the power of 10 art to communicate knowledge was recognized and this was available at no cost. Just as many of our art educators today assert, John Dana, Newark Museum Director, 1909-1929, saw the art in museums as much more than objects to gaze at. He saw 'only one solution to social problems—the increase of intelligent sympathy' (Si 1ver,l978) and art was a means to achieve that end. So that museum visitors could have help understanding the art work displayed, lecturers and docents were provided as teachers. The Boston Museum of Art as early as 1907 trained these people to teach towards a work of art, that is, pointing out factors contributing to art not those drawn from it . The Depression saw museums in financial crisis. Many could only stay open by drastically reducing staff and salaries and relying on vol- unteer staff. The push to stay open was strong because it was seen that museums offered relief from the grim conditions of the economic situa- tion. Many out-of-work people 'found' museums. Some museums offered free workshops and courses free for people on relief. These programs justified requests for public funding of the museums. Federal programs backed by some private funding facilitated progressive programs in educa- tion especially for high schools which were much better attended than they had been previously because there was no work for the young people when they left school. Theodore Low concluded that as a result of the Depression 'museums became aware that they existed to serve a public which was willing to be served but which had definite needs and desires and refused to be fed the nectar of the museums' choosing' (Silver,!978,p.16). Collections and 11 educational programs had to expand and increase their relevance to the desires of the public. It also became apparent that museums could help to keep up the public's desire for first hand information. T.R. Adams, museum adult education advocate, saw that crucial skills acquired through the study of art could help the public deal with the plethora of new and confusing ideas abounding as technology boomed and political ideas that were often new and dangerous emerged (Adams,1937,p.9). In the 1960's, museums were recognized as agencies of cultural in- doctrination and thus powerful social institutions as well as vehicles for teaching cultural history. Museums were seen as having to move to- wards service to minorities rather than be merely elitist proponents of western European aesthetics and culture. Outreach programs that took programs to the people rather than people to the museum became popular. Museums thus became available to those who did not visit them. Many such programs continue today but are used mostly by schools. Education efforts by museums have now focused from the adult to the child and schools are the prime users of museum facilities. Museums have be- come a sort of 'field trip heaven' for the entertainment of classes of school children and their teachers. The original observation of this chapter was that the museums could become a great help to the teacher. The potential of this relationship is not met by the type of activity mentioned above. The museum educators and teachers could work together to provide a much more valuable experi- ence for teachers and students. What is needed is to create a gallery habit among the students rather than promote a 'one-shot' encounter with art. Because it is not possible to accommodate all of the students for repeated class visits, programs must be developed so that both the 12 schools and the galleries encourage students to visit the gallery on their own and help them develop the critical and analytic skills, back- ground information and confidence to use collections and special exhibi- tions. The role of the museum or art gallery as an educator has a tradition as long as the existence of museums as we know them. Their very mandate of collecting and conserving art or artifacts and making the collection, available to the public for study implies that they are an educational institution. Often the availability of the museum as a study resource is limited to scholars or interested adults. But more and more often muse- ums and art galleries are providing programs specifically designed for the use of school groups by the museum staff or education officer. Such programs are based on the generally accepted premise that chil- dren must be taught to use the museum and that class visits are important even though, as some museum staff will give as a reason for the absence of school programs, the fact that 'the essential communication within the museum is a personal one that exists between the individual and the ex- hibits' (Cameron,1967,p.33). In order to better facilitate that communi- cation by helping to provide the child with a way of seeing museum study should be an early and ongoing experience. In providing such experience, the museum or gallery education goals should be to open up the world of sight and sound and touch for each child by sharpening his perceptual skills and to make him sensitive to new sources of data in the world around him (Cameron,1967). The role of the gallery or museum education program should thus become one of 'motivation and stimulation' (Merrill, 1967). That educational programs at art galleries are used by schools is 13 immediately evident i f one has ever been in the foyer of a large art gal- lery on a weekday morning when a seemingly endless wave of excited school children pours through the front door. The problem of attracting users for educational programs is not one that faces the staffs at such large, well established, big city galleries such as the Art Gallery of Ontario in Toronto or many of the large galleries in the United States. Accord- ing to staff at the AGO, their main problem is being able to accommodate groups for repeat visits. However, small local public galleries often find the opposite to be the case. The small gallery has a much smaller staff which is often re- quired to fulfill many functions rather than be able to devote its time to a single area such as education programming. Such a staff simply does not have time to be able to adequately design and promote programs for the use of school groups. If the small gallery is fortunate enough to be able to inspire an active group of volunteer help to do much of this work, much of this problem is alleviated, but the major responsibility rests with the education officer. What the smaller gallery is also fighting is the commonly held atti- tude that because the gallery is small and local it is probably not as 'good' as a large city gallery. The local teachers may well have this attitude, and rather than spend the time to organize a trip to the local gallery will arrange a trip to a nearby city where the children can visit many places of interest in one outing. The class may visit an art gal- lery, a museum, tour a real city and maybe stop off for a peek at the zoo. The problem of the small gallery staff is the development of a pro- gram that demonstrates to local schools that the small gallery has much to offer. The galleries' very proximity to the schools facilitates 14 repeat visits to the gallery with much less fuss and expense than a re- peat visit to the city. The staff at the gallery may be as well informed as that in the larger gallery and can offer the same quality of learning to children. Most important, the small gallery staff is probably much more accessible to the teacher and willing to adapt programs for particu- lar groups and teachers. The school district that has a commitment to providing their stu- dents with sound programs in the arts has a valuable ally and resource in the local gallery. The New Orleans Museum of Art, although a very large institution, has become an active part of the arts programs of that school district. According to a school board official, 'Our previous experience with the museum had been random and purely at the discretion of the classroom teacher. We felt there was a need for school staff and museum staff to work together to make the museum visit a more educational one. We wanted to find a way to mesh the resources and objectives of the schools with the museum objects . . . ' (Trusty,1978). In the programs developed through that coordination of effort, teachers and museum staff worked together on the development of program theme ideas and content. Cooperatively developed workbooks provide ideas for orientation to museum visits, background information and bibliography, classroom activities directly giving background to at-the-gallery activities and follow-up ideas not only in art activity but also incorporating music, theatre and other subject area projects in keeping with the schools' interdiscipli- nary approach to programming. Extensive evaluation of that program through teacher, museum staff and student contributions has shown that the collaborative effort has helped the students to have a more inte- grated and strongly reinforced experience than had been the case with I 15 former programs. In addition, teachers were able to learn more about what was in the museum and how to use it (although it was felt that many teachers still felt uncomfortable away from their home turf) and museum staff learned more about schools and teaching. Examples of combining the efforts of educational institutions such as that of the New Orleans project and others such as those in the Museum of South Texas and the Philadelphia Museum of Art, show smaller galleries and school districts the potential benefits of collaboration to both par- ties. It should however be kept in mind that the two institutions are essentially different though and that neither should undertake to become the other. That is, galleries should not replace the school program or attempt to copy a school, but should retain its unique quality. Programs should still retain the valuable, independent ideas of museum staff. In addition to improving programming, school-museum collaboration has been found to alleviate budget problems of both groups by sharing some expenses and cutting down on the duplication of services. In some cases school boards provide transportation to the museum and help with museum staff salaries while the museum provides facilities and, of course, the objects to be studied. Support of the school boards also insures that supervisory staff encourage teachers to participate in pro- jects with the museum. What museum educators stand to gain from the collaboration is up-to- date knowledge of learning theory and school curriculum theory. In the past, and still in many art galleries, the format of most museum visits has been that of the tour. Learning theory research over many years does not support the effectiveness of learning by the osmosis process inherent in the lecture-tour format. With this knowledge the museum educator 16 should attempt to develop a format that will encourage more learning. A museum educational program should have as its basis the goal of teaching children to look—art appreciation to foster enjoyment and awaken curi- osity. In the traditional tour format the student makes few contribu- tions to discussion. In essence he is being asked to evaluate what he sees according to what some adults are telling him is 'art'. In fact, the research of Mary Rouse has indicated that the child makes his selec- tions 'almost entirely on the basis of personal preference and he almost always makes choices in opposition to those of art experts' (Rouse,1971, p.20). If this is so then the task of the museum educator is not to merely dispense information on a tour but to try to find ways of intro- ducing newcomers to 'sensory experiences to stimulate powers of percep- tion, feeling and thought' (Borcoman,!969,p.22). Museum staff must de- velop an awareness of the students as people. Who better to help them in gaining that knowledge than those who know children best, the teachers? 'As a school system plans and develops its curriculum, obligations to both teachers and students must be considered. Much of this does not concern us in the museum, but one obligation that should concern us is the role of the museum in curriculum development' (Wood,1967,p.27). Most museums are not an integral part of the school system but they are in their educational programs trying to serve that system. As a result, educators and curators in the galleries and museums should not only plan their programs around their collections and knowledge, but according to the needs of the schools as these are indicated in their curriculum. Programs at the museum must change both with the exhibitions and the school curricula. This is the only way that they will be both meaningful and useful to the users. 17 So far in this chapter the roles of the museum officer and the school board have been discussed with little mention of the link in the communication between schools and galleries that is perhaps the most important one—the teacher. The teachers' role is probably most import- ant in ensuring that the museum experience is most profitable. 'I find that only when the teacher has himself had the experience of looking, of learning to read an object visually, of appreciating the many issues and interests which can be roused, is he able to make full educational use of the museum visit . . . ' (Newson,1978,p.462). This observation of Hans Zet- terberg when he was a British Museum educator is seconded by most educa- tors in the museum field. Many museum staff observe that when a class comes to a museum the teacher seems as unfamiliar and uncomfortable with the new surroundings as are the children. Not only are the teachers not habitual museum visitors but they feel uncomfortable fearing that in this environment their position of authority with their class is threatened. Such teachers seem to react either by abandoning their class to the muse- um staff or by attempting to bias their children's opinions in such a way as to make the job of the museum staff very awkward. Perhaps this would indicate that the efforts of museum staff in devoting most of their time to developing student programs is misplaced. Perhaps the real target for museum efforts should be the teacher. 'I believe that theoretically it is better for us (museum educators) to teach the teacher and leave the important task of taking the children through the gallery to the one who knows children best' (Fansler,l932). Such philosophy is the basis of many major gallery education programs. The Victoria and Albert Museum has had as its major education focus the education of teachers in training for jobs in the British school system. 18 The teacher has received instruction in the art of teaching and knows the personalities and capabilities of their students so that they should know best how to present information to their class. The museum staffs' con- tact with the students is usually limited to the forty-five minutes or so that they are with them in the gallery. The influence of the teacher on the group is much larger and could easily counter the impact museum staff have if they fail to reinforce the museum visit with activities in the classroom. It is the opinion of many educators that 'what the (museum) experience means to the students is often determined more by the way the teacher fits the visit into the classroom studies than by the museum edu- cator or docent who conducts that visit' (Newson,1978,p.463). If the teacher can be encouraged and supported in efforts to use museums effect- ively then the visit will be enhanced. The experience will have been one that is shared by the teacher and his own students and not totally con- trolled by someone else not as well acquainted with the personality of the group. Ideally, the teachers should receive instruction about how to use the museum as a part of their university training. This is almost non- existent now except in rare cases such as the programs that the Victoria and Albert have set up in cooperation with teacher colleges. Most ef- forts to train teachers in museum use is haphazard, relying mostly on the initiative of particularly interested student teachers. In the past, student teachers at the Faculty of Education at Queen's University in Kingston have had the option to do a part of their teaching practicum at the Art Gallery of Ontario. Such a program certainly has benefits for the teacher in training but it is largely a case of preaching to the con- verted. What is really needed is a means of reaching more teachers in 19 more conventional teaching situations. Because what the teacher learns in teacher training is easily lost in the avalanche of information that falls upon him in that relatively short period and also does not relate to any experience the student has yet had, perhaps the time to try to reach him is later. The museum educator who said 'maybe you shouldn't get to them (teachers) in training but wait until they're in classroom practice . . . then they panic—maybe then we can help them' (Newson.l978, p.465) was probably being most realistic. What the museum has to teach the teacher is not only facts about the particular pieces on exhibition in the museum but also suggestions about how to guide and shape the students' personal responses to the visual world. The teacher has not received guidance about either of these areas in previous training. The teacher is not exploring them in the classroom because they are unsure about both the incorporation of them into the classroom programs and the adequacy of their knowledge to develop a good program. Many would probably be surprised to find that their knowledge of teaching and of other subject areas would give them more help than they had thought. What most art educators and museum educators would want to show them is that art and visual literacy, and thus museum use, are effective when integrated into other areas of study. How then does the museum staff reach the teacher? Many museums are trying a variety of approaches. Some museums such as the Cleveland Muse- um of Art and the museum in Cincinnati offer credit courses to teachers in the summer or through night school that not only teach background in- formation in the academic orientation of the museum art history or an- thropology but also suggest ways that the teacher can introduce these subjects to their students. Other museums offer teacher resource centres 20 (St. Louis Art Museum) that provide equipment, visual aids and kits for teachers to borrow, as well as short workshops which introduce teachers to museum programs, collections, and make suggestions about classroom activities. Such programs of course require a fairly extensive museum staff that can devote its time to such endeavours as well as conduct its in-gallery programs for visiting groups. The small museum or gallery does not have such staff available and thus has a more difficult time offering all of the services to teachers that it would like to. The benefits that a small museum could derive from training teachers to be more active in museum education may stand to be more than those accruing to a larger institution. If the museum edu- cator at a small gallery could receive the help from teachers her time could be freed to spend on special projects and more complete programming (Silver,1978,p.463). Some galleries and museums have developed ideas for self-guided tours which help a teacher and her class visit the museum without the aid of a guide, such as the Museum of Anthropology at the University of British Columbia. Others have developed or collected pack- ages of information that can be sent out to a teacher to give some back- ground information to the exhibitions. Where such programs fall short is in providing guidance in how to use that compiled information. What the staff at such galleries need to do is find a means of extending their resources so that they are not wasting their efforts on half developed ideas. In setting up its programs, for both teachers and students, museum education staff has to face the question of what sort of role they will assume. Will they function as examples to the classroom teacher of how to approach art in education, as a resource for teachers who need their 21 specific knowledge or as critics of art and art education practices? Or will they attempt to amalgamate all three roles? The priority of any educational program should be developing the art education of the chil- dren who use the art gallery or art museum, but the museum must face the fact that if their programs are to be used to their greatest potential they must win the confidence and help of teachers and school districts. This will require learning from schools and teachers what they can about curriculum, life in the classroom, and teaching skills. It will also require that the museum staff contribute what it can to the teachers' knowledge. The museum must try to give teachers exposure and practice to ® help them build confidence with art and the museum, areas that many have not previously had the opportunity to study, and to promote the integra- tion of art into education. Most of a l l , if Dr. Ott's (Ott, 1981 ,p.l5) vision of a partnership is to be realized, it must be understood that both partners, museum and school personnel, are professionals, each with specific knowledge to be shared. A Survey of Vancouver Area Museum Educators In searching the literature concerning art gallery and museum educa- tional programs and practices, it becomes apparent that there is a lack of available material specifically about Canadian programs. Alan Bassing and Chantelle Levielle in connection with the Montreal Museum of Fine Arts and Concordia University, and Robert Ott have recently contributed to the literature in both Canadian and American publications. The prob- lems of all art gallery educational programs are universal so while Cana- dian writings are just beginning to appear, American and British work is relevant and helpful for Canadian gallery educators. While there are educational programs and departments at most major and many small public 22 galleries, most programs are in their infancy and are struggling to sur- vive with small staffs and inadequate budgets. There seems to be little time or manpower available to undertake either evaluative studies of pro- grams in existence or needs studies for those galleries undertaking the formation of new programs or the revision of existing ones. In order to establish a frame of reference for the research to be undertaken in this thesis, a preliminary study was designed to review the state of museum and gallery educational programs in Vancouver and the surrounding Lower Mainland area of British Columbia. In this way the work to be undertaken becomes particularly relevant to the Canadian situation and does not rely for guidance entirely on available American studies. Six museums and art galleries were chosen to be reviewed in the study. The institutions were chosen to provide a variety of different situations with regard to setting (urban and suburban), type of collec- tion (art gallery, anthropological), funding sources and affiliations (independent, part of community or municipal center, part of arts centre or part of a university). The person in charge of educational programs at each museum was con- tacted by telephone to introduce her to the project and a time was ar- ranged for a personal interview to take place at the museum or art gal- lery. Each interview took from one to two hours or more as most of the interviewees were more than happy to share their thoughts. The inter- views each followed the format of the questionnaire included as Appendix I. After describing the programs under their supervision, each inter- viewee was questioned about educational program staffing, their contact and relation with the local school district and individual teachers, their theories with regard to museum education and art education in gen- 23 eral and their prophecies for the future of educational programs through museums. The educational provisions of these six institutions proved to be as varied as were their physical settings. They ranged from the near ab- sence of programming at North Vancouver's Presentation House Gallery through traditional tours at the Vancouver Art Gallery and the Burnaby Art Gallery, self-guided activities encouraging teachers to share learn- ing with the students at the University of British Columbia Museum of Anthropology, to programs such as those at the Vancouver Centennial Muse- um and the Surrey Art Gallery that combine tour format with various work- shop participation programs. Of those museum educators interviewed, half had previous teaching experience with the age group for which they were designing programs. Of the remaining half, some had acted as teaching assistants at university but not in the public school system. Those institutions that did not re- quire teaching experience of their education staff, such as the Vancouver Centennial Museum, hire their staff on the basis of their knowledge of what the collection covers. Museum skills and a strong academic back- ground are there felt to be more important in the fostering of communica- tion between the artifacts and the viewer. It is up to the teacher to prepare the children for that communication. Other institutions favour an academic preparation in the field of the collection combined with knowledge of children and schools in order to be able to present informa- tion about the collection in ways that will be of the most benefit for students. The degree of contact that museums have with schools also varies greatly. Generally a lack of contact with the schools results not from 24 disinterest but from lack of time on the part of museum educators. At Presentation House there was no familiarity with the school curricula and contact was limited to sending out newsletters and hoping that teachers would contact the gallery. The Vancouver Art Gallery finds their program is well used so it does not actively set up contact with schools except by newsletter. They will however custom design a tour for a group if the teacher contacts them in time. The Burnaby Art Gallery educational pro- grams are in their infancy but the education officer hopes to be able to visit schools and make personal contact with teachers in her area so that she can plan to enhance the curricula in general use. The University of British Columbia Museum of Anthropology and the Vancouver Centennial Museum have made it a point to know what goes on in the schools. If the museums can present their collections in such a way as to relate them to something that the students are studying then they will be more receptive to the information that is conveyed through the artifacts. These museums also found that if they have contact with the school boards and subject coordinators, etc., the individual teachers will be encouraged by them to use the museums. At the Surrey Art Gallery, art and social studies co- ordinators of the local school district are consulted about curriculum content before workshops are developed, so the gallery is developing pro- grams that the teachers will be able to use to enhance classroom activi- ties. All of the educators indicated that they have contact with indi- vidual teachers only when these teachers ask the museum for a tour date or for information. Some educators found that they had an ongoing con- tact with some teachers who are regular users of the programs but had little opportunity to meet any that were not already museum users. The programs offered at the museums all focus on elementary school 25 children. This is not because of any lack of conviction that high school students can benefit from museum contact but because it is elementary school teachers who by far book the larger number of visits. It seems that high school. teachers run into more difficulties trying to excuse their students from other teachers' classes in order to free enough time for a visit than do elementary school teachers who usually teach all sub- jects to one class. One concern that most of the educators expressed was that the teach- ers who brought their classes to the museum were, for the large part, not prepared for the visit and thus had not adequately prepared the class nor provided to follow up the visit with a classroom activity. It seemed that most of the teachers' preparation had been in making the arrange- ments for transport to the museum, parental permission and excuse from school, all time consuming and demanding tasks. The children had been told where they were going but that was usually the extent of the prepa- ration. It seemed that many of the teachers were not seasoned 'museum goers' and thus felt uncomfortable or unfamiliar with the content and routine of museums. From this preliminary study, a number of recommendations and hopes for the future of museum education arose. Foremost was the hope that the museums could reach more individual classroom teachers in order to famil- iarize them with what the museums and art galleries have to offer them and their classes and to help them plan ways to integrate museum visits into regular classroom programs. The current practices of mass mail outs to school districts and schools is useful in giving officials a general idea of what is happening at museums, but all too often this information does not filter down to the classroom teacher who can use i t . If museums 26 want to attract the attention of these teachers they must find a way to make more personal contact with them. Unfortunately this is a time con- suming and expensive endeavour but could be facilitated with the help of volunteers on phoning committees to obtain the names of the appropriate teacher contact at each school or by sitting in on meetings and confer- ences in relevant subject areas to meet the teachers in person. The museums' staff effort would be appreciated by the teachers who would then feel they had a name and face to associate with the museum mail outs. It appears to this researcher that if indeed museum staff are con- cerned that they help the teacher provide their classes with a meaningful museum experience, then perhaps some of their efforts should be refocused to developing programs that teach the teacher rather than just the child. In addition, museum staff should consider the wisdom of hiring staff that have familiarity with schools, classroom routine and curriculum. The museum would then be preparing programs for users whose situation and needs they understand. It would seem a wasted effort and an incomplete learning experience if programs are not designed for their users. A common complaint of museum staff is that they do not have enough space to provide other than tour activities and an often voiced complaint of teachers is a lack of budget for transportation to museums. Why then could not schools and museums cooperate by sharing facilities? Many schools have empty classrooms because of declining enrollment and it would be much less expensive to transport one museum staff member than thirty children. Such an arrangement should not, of course, replace the museum visit and the children's contact with the actual 'objects' there but could introduce them to valuable concepts in visual literacy and 27 introduce them to such objects that might be transportable. Teachers would be able to see by example how they can use museum studies in their classroom. Museum staff would have the opportunity to experience the school environment first hand. In addition, both institutions might be spared some of the expense of the duplication of facilities and equip- ment. For many museums, such a program would be prohibitively expensive as repeated visits to schools would accrue heavy transportation cost for staff and materials. Transporting materials often would put much wear on the materials and be awkward for staff. At the museum or art gallery, concern for the educational programs should be a major one for all of the staff, not just the educator. In most museums and galleries the responsibility for the choosing and ar- ranging of the exhibitions is the responsibility of the director and cur- ators. The educator then has to deal with presenting this exhibition to the public and the children having had no role in creating the exhibition itself. While directors and curators are experts on their collections, the educator is supposed to be an expert on the users of the museum. The most effective exhibitions would combine the knowledge of both. It is encouraging to hear that the Vancouver Museum plans to include the Museum Educator on its exhibition committee in the near future. In summary, the discussions with educators reiterated the need for more communication between museums and schools. A primary concern is that teachers be made more aware of how to use museums and that museums be more aware of those for whom they are preparing programs. In order for museum programs to be effective, there must be an end to the strong territorial ism that seems to arise when museum educators and teachers meet. 28 . CHAPTER 3 THE SURREY SITUATION The Surrey Art Gallery Staff Assessment of the Community and the Gallery's Role in the Community As a result of the survey described in the preceding chapter, a con- tact was made with the Surrey Art Gallery. The staff of this art gallery demonstrated an interest in the continuous evaluation and updating of their educational program and had a philosophy of programming for schools similar to that which I was formulating. When the gallery was given funds to work on their education program (see Chapter 6), we were able to work together. The Surrey Art Gallery is typical of many art galleries today. It i s small, has a small staff, exists in a suburban community or town rather than a large city and must pursue a vigorous program to attract i t s audience. It is thus a good subject for study because the solutions to i t s dilemmas may be instructive to the many galleries in similar situ- ations. The Surrey Art Gallery exists as a part of an Arts Centre which also houses a theatre, rehearsal f a c i l i t i e s , a theatre gallery, set storage and construction f a c i l i t i e s , two classrooms and a pottery studio, in addition to office space for the staff. All of these f a c i l i t i e s are housed in a newly renovated building, very impressively designed. The building is set in Bear Creek Park, a large park containing a track, playing f i e l d , swimming pool, picnic area and t r a i l s . It is an attrac- tive and well used site, although isolated from any shopping or business area that might attract additional drop-in v i s i t o r s . The gallery staff have three areas of the centre in which to offer 29 programs—the main gallery, the theatre gallery and the classrooms and pottery studio. The last two areas are shared with the art programmer for the municipality, who runs children's and adult arts and craft work- shops and courses. The whole complex is funded and operated by the Municipality of the District of Surrey and its Parks and Recreation Department, who pay for both faci l i t ies and staff. In addition to municipal funds, the gallery depends on such funding sources as the British Columbia Cultural Fund and the Koerner Foundation. Because i t is a young gallery with limited funding and storage fac i l i t ies , the Surrey Art Gallery does not have a permanent collection but maintains a program of monthly changing exhibitions assembled by the staff or borrowed from other galleries. The gallery staff estimate that they receive some 1,500 visitors per month, including casual visitors, those attending specific gallery events, and school groups. The gallery visitors book indicates that most visitors are from the Surrey area, although some of the special events attract visitors from Vancouver and surrounding municipalities. The gallery supports a small staff consisting of the director, the curator, a half-time curator for the theatre gallery, a preparator, and an education and events coordinator. The services of two office staff are shared with the rest of the center staff. In addition there are three education instructors employed on a per class basis. Volunteers do many of the tasks associated with the gallery--mailouts, maintaining the small reference library and acting as docents, of which there are approx- imately sixteen, for the educational program. In order to gain some insight into how the gallery views itself both 30 as in institution and as an institution that is a part of a particular community, I interviewed the gallery director, Rosa Ho. The community in which the gallery exists is a very diverse one. The District of Surrey encompasses a number of small town sites some of which have all but disappeared over the years. There is no one downtown business and shopping area, but five town centers—Whalley and Guildford in the north, Newton in the center and Cloverdale and South Surrey in the south. In general, the south is rural, Guildford has a fairly high den- sity population and the other areas are between the two in population density. In general it is suburban, a place where people live because single family housing is affordable and the setting is pleasant. There is little industry in the areas so those who work in the community are mostly involved in small service industries. Others commute to Vancouver to work. It is basically a community of young families and families with a long tradition in the area. The director sees the community as definitely one in the process of change as the population grows. While in the past the education level of the citizens could be considered lower than that in Vancouver, today, with an influx of city-raised young adults and the establishment of Doug- las College and Kwantlen College, interest in higher education is ris- ing. Ms. Ho sees the community as having a mixed philosophy towards the arts. While it is largely what she described as a "WASP" community, there are active cultural groups who support their own dance, music and art at a grassroots level. The people of the community tend to be 'doers' who are active supporters of their own enterprises and use the arts for social, recreational or leisure purposes rather than for intel- 31 lectual reasons. When it comes to the 'fine arts' this group find it difficult, as do the gallery staff, to establish what they want because their familiarity is only with the work of their peers and not the 'art world'. They are, Ms. Ho says, reticent to seek out something different or 'better'. Ms. Ho thinks that by far the larger group in the community are the non-joiners, perhaps those who have moved from the city and are reticent to join the local groups because they feel little in common with local people, or are looking for something more than such groups offer, such as enrichment through the fine arts. The difficulty the gallery staff has is in identifying with this diversified community in which most of them do not live. The only member of the immediate gallery staff (excluding office personnel) to live in the Surrey area is a family person. Everyone else is young and either single or childless, and live in Vancouver where they are close to the activities and amenities that they enjoy. Because the Surrey Art Gallery is funded by the municipality, it finds that it is directly involved in the community, probably more so than many other galleries. As a part of the Cultural Services Branch of the municipality it must comply with the needs and goals of that body and, be answerable to it . Such control by local government puts consid- erable pressure on an institution to serve its particular community. The Surrey Art Gallery is involved with its community in both pas- sive and active ways. Ms. Ho describes as passive involvement, the pre- sentation of exhibitions to enrich the citizens' experience, knowledge and pleasure. It provides the opportunity for the individual to view the art on display and interact on a personal basis. More active is the 32 involvement with children through the education program, and with adults and families through the events programs which provide a wide variety of unstructured, enjoyable experiences designed to complement the exhibi- tions. In addition, members of the community, individually or as part of an organization, have access to the theatre gallery to display their own work. In i ts exhibition rationale, the gallery staff tries to provide experiences that will enrich the lives of community members by offering something more than work that is already in their realm of experience. While the theatre gallery exhibits local work, the main gallery attempts to go beyond. The exhibition rationale is biased towards the contempor- ary, but, also encompasses Canadian and international trends. The staff admit to a special interest in the work of lesser known but able British Columbian artists. Historic subjects are presented as well as the more avant garde. The staff try to provide variety within the exhibition pro- gram to attract visitors of different interests. In summary, they wish to provide a balanced variety of "good" art for public viewing in addi- tion to building up a good national reputation. Ms. Ho says that i t is really quite diff icult to say which exhibi- tions seem to work best ( i .e . provide the greatest draw) because, for example, while some conceptual shows have been a great success, others have failed. Attendance at exhibitions seems to depend as much on such factors as time of year, press coverage, advertising and the weather as on the particular content of the show. Big name artists of course at- tract much attention. Shows for which the gallery provides educational material also seem to attract more visitors. Acceptance by the public of some of the more avant garde work is slow, a problem which will always be 33 there, but seems no more of a problem in Surrey than in larger institu- tions like the Vancouver Art Gallery. The gallery must treat such shows as an opportunity to teach. Exhibitions are accompanied by materials which will help the public learn. Because the Surrey Art Gallery sees education as within its mandate, i t provides experiences not only for the general public, but for school children as well. Ms. Ho is not hesitant to admit that programs for children are a vehicle to reach out to parents, who in seeing the pleas- ure that their children derived from a gallery visit will develop incen- tive to visit the gallery themselves or as a family. In addition, by ex- posing the children to pleasant experiences in the arts, the gallery can initiate a lasting, future interest. Through its educational programs the gallery hopes that it impresses upon teachers the idea that art is not a side issue but is relative to curriculum, both in art and other subject areas. The Surrey teacher is probably from as diverse a back- ground as the rest of the Surrey population and needs the same encourage- ments and justifications to visit the gallery. Ingrid Kolt is the Education and Events Coordinator at the Surrey Art Gallery, and as such is responsible for implementing a program for schools as well as adults. She relates that when the gallery first open- ed, before its present staff and facility were established, it was very much a community place—a facility without a staff. One of the first artists to show in that gallery brought in kids for activities related to his work with the philosophy of 'get'em while they're young'. These early programs were experimental, depending on the individual initiative of the artists involved, and on available grants. Their popularity, how- ever, established the need for someone to function in the role of coordi- 34 nator and Ingrid's position was. established. When faced with the task of setting up an educational program for an art gallery, one is faced with several alternatives. Once the programmer has assessed what faci l i t ies and personnel resources are available, the program format may be any combination of the following: (1) tours con- ducted by curatorial staff, docents or education staff, (2) film or video programs if there is money but no staff available, (3) 'hands-on' work- shops, (4) written tour outlines for teachers to use to take their own class around the exhibitions, or (5) classroom discussion and hands-on activity for the teacher and class, with or without gallery staff in- volvement. All of these 'in-gallery' programs could be supplemented with kits and materials available for use of teachers in their classrooms. Formal and informal surveys of teachers by the gallery staff indi- cated that, on the whole, teachers have l i t t le art training and may, therefore, not be aware of the gallery or using i t . This is not the fault of the teachers--it's just the nature of the educational system. Teacher training teaches future teachers a production based way to teach art to children and school boards often have very vague art curricula guidelines. Boards tend to provide teachers with 'how to make' informa- tion. Edmund Feldman observed this to be a universal problem in art edu- cation (Feldman,1978,p.l9). Secondly, they found that teachers need to be offered programs which make i t easy for them to be able to justify the time away from school. The programs must (1) connect visual arts with other areas of curriculum, especially social studies, and (2) provide the students with an active experience. Now that the Surrey Art Gallery is settled into its new faci l i t ies , i t is able to offer a range of programs for schools. To best describe 35 these offerings, here is the text of the information that is sent out to all Surrey schools (see Appendix 2 for complete poster). TOUR AND WORKSHOP PACKAGES AND BACK! The Gallery is pleased to announce the return of this popular pro- gram. We can now accommodate 2 classes simultaneously on program days as a result of extensive classroom renovations. Class A and Class B will participate in different workshops concurrently. Each class will also receive a guided tour of the current exhibition. Preparation and follow-up materials will be provided. Tour and Workshop Packages can be tailored to suit various age levels. Each session is limited to a maximum of 30 participants and runs from 9:45 a.m. - Noon. Advance booking is required. TUESDAY MORNINGS . Inuit Arts and Culture - an invaluable opportunity to learn about the changing arts and culture of the Inuit. Activities include printmaking, slides, games and "hands-on" exhibits of Inuit tools and clothing on loan from the Government of the Northwest Territo- ries. Suitable for grade 3 through adult. . Seeing Ourselves through Art - take a journey through history to view the people of Canada through the eyes of our artists, past and present. Slides, discussion, visual arts activities and an art pro- ject designed to encourage self-expression are included. Suitable for grade 4 through adult. FRIDAY MORNINGS . The World of Clay - explore the world history of man's manipula- tion of clay by seeing demonstrations and examples, and working with clay and various clay tools. Suitable for grade K through adult. 36 Extensive self-guided follow-up materials are available on loan to participants. Groups wishing to use these materials at the Gallery may do so by booking the classroom in advance for use after their workshop. . Art Encounter - learn about works on exhibit by seeing, discussing and doing, under the guidance of a trained volunteer docent. Art Encounter involves participants in a variety of perceptual, movement and visual arts activities specifically designed for each new exhi- bition. Suitable for grade K through adult. CLASSROOM WORKSHOPS The Gallery's Extension Program offers a range of self-guided Work- shops, Poster and Slide-Sound Kits for use in your classroom or faci l i ty on a library loan basis. Most kits may be adapted for use with any age group. Kits include West Coast Native Peoples, Pioneer Arts, The Treasures of Tutankhamun and the Language of Colour (also excellent for intermediate science classes). Advance booking is required. All of these programs try to encourage teachers to bring their classes to the gallery by making i t easy and relevant for the teacher to f i t a visi t into her classroom curriculum. The gallery staff settled on the tour/workshop format for most of the programming for a number of reasons, Ms. Kolt reports. The gallery staff are firm believers in what they call 'concrete learning'. They feel that children will learn from discussion, not lectures, but that i t really 'sinks in' when discussion is coupled with hands-on experience. Indeed, they have found that teachers insist on activities as a part of their gallery v is i t . Because the gallery has no permanent collection i t 37 is very difficult to be able to design different programs for each month's exhibition, especially with an education staff of one. The "Art Encounters" workshop was developed to deal directly with each exhibition, involving the classes in a number of exercises in the gallery itself. It is a great deal of work for the staff to be able to change and adapt these activities for each show. All of the other workshops, while taking place in the new gallery classrooms, are not given without a tour of the current exhibitions. The tours are a part of the package in order to give students the opportunity to relate concepts they have discussed in the gallery classroom to the art in the exhibitions through discussion with the guide. So far the gallery is focusing on programs for elementary schools, although much of the material is easily adaptable for high school groups. Through its educational programs, in keeping with its over-all phi- losophies, the Surrey Art Gallery attempts to offer the community, through its children and teachers, something more than is available in school art curriculum or through arts and crafts classes. It tries to foster an enjoyment and appreciation of the 'fine arts' through its own exhibitions, and supplementary information. A Survey of Surrey Teachers' Attitudes Towards Gallery Education A major factor in the success of museum and art gallery programs for schools is, as the New Orleans Museum of Art found in its work with the local school district, the building of communication channels between the galleries and the schools. These channels should not only be used for the dispersal of advertising for programs offered by the galleries, but also for gathering information from school officials and teachers about 38 the type of programs that would be most useful. Information about the curriculum in the schools, the teachers art background and the particular problems of the schools—arranging time away from the classroom, trans- portation and the length of time that can be put aside for trips should be sought from schools. The teacher is probably the most important source of information because it is this person who knows the curriculum in the various subject areas and how best to introduce information to the children they teach every day. The gallery educator should make use of this information while planning any programs that are supposed to be for school children to ensure that they are presenting appropriate topics in an appropriate manner for their intended participants. It seems, from talking to museum and gallery educators in the Lower Mainland and reviewing the available literature, that most use teacher input to evaluate programs that are already offered to them. Few of the sample programs described in Silver's and Newson's 'The Art Museum as Educator' cite gathering suggestions and ideas from teachers as important parts of the background for their program design. The programs of the East Cleveland Art Museum and the Brooklyn Museum both used the school district officials as links to the schools but seemed only to communicate with teachers when preparing for their specific visit, after the programs were set. Teachers were however asked for evaluation of the programs (Silver,1978,Chapter 6). While such evaluation is most valuable for pro- gram assessment and planning future changes, it would seem that opinions of teachers at an earlier stage might result in a program that requires fewer revisions and attracts more teacher and student use. It should also be realized that for the most part, asking the opinions of program 39 users after they have used the programs is essentially only asking for. reaffirmation of the support the teachers have already demonstrated by booking programs. The teacher who should be reached is that teacher who does not use the programs, for whatever reason. Because teachers who do not use gallery programs offered to them are by far the larger group, they might be able to offer insights into why they do not use programs and thus suggest what galleries can do to attract their use of galleries. For this reason, gallery educators should attempt to plan programs with teachers rather than for teachers and school groups. Because of the above observation, it was decided to attempt to sur- vey teachers, particularly those who did use the programs as well as those who did not, about educational programs for art galleries. The Surrey Art Gallery is a small gallery that is doing an admirable job of arranging exhibitions of an extremely high calibre. The gallery lacks a permanent collection but has exhibitions in their main gallery and an adjacent theatre gallery in the main lobby of the Surrey Arts Cen- ter. The main gallery, who's primary mandate is to exhibit and promote promising contemporary British Columbian artists, in monthly changing ex- hibitions, also shows the best of British Columbia art, the arts of the Inuit and nationally circulating exhibitions. The theatre gallery fea- tures the work of local artists and arts groups as well as work from local schools and colleges. Because it would be almost impossible for the gallery education staff to plan a program completely around such rapidly changing exhibitions, they offer the schools a tour of the cur- rent show combined with a theme workshop in one of the gallery classroom areas. The workshops combine a slide show/discussion with a hands-on project. (For more details of the gallery exhibition policy and program 40 descriptions, see Chapter 3 , Part 1.) Although all of the schools in the Surrey School District are sent an attractive and informative poster outlining the programs and services offered and booking procedures, a review of gallery records indicated that the programs were booked by a small group of teachers and schools, who use the various programs repeatedly. There were a great many schools who never sent classes to the gallery. Of the sixty-nine elementary schools in Surrey District , only ten have sent classes regularly to the gallery in the past three years. What should be done to encourage the teachers at those schools not represented to introduce to their students this valuable community resource? The f i rst approach to conducting this survey proved to be disap- pointing. A questionnaire (see Appendix 3) was sent to one teacher in each of ten schools which were not using the gallery education program. The teachers were chosen because the administration at their schools indicated that these were teachers who were interested in art and/or tak- ing their classes on field trips. The teachers represented a spread of grades three to six, the target grades for the gallery programs. Al- though the teachers were sent a letter explaining the study, and a stamp- ed return envelope, and many were asked to participate in the study per- sonally, only two replies arrived, and these only after a reminder phone ca l l . These results seemed to confirm the warnings of museum educators that i t is extremely diff icult to get responses from most teachers. It could be that the timing for the survey (October and November) was bad. Schools were s t i l l reeling under the effects of severe budget cuts and classroom activities were in full swing. 41 It was decided to attempt another approach to surveying the teach- ers. It.was obvious that this second attempt should avoid the pitfall of getting lost among the many other obligations in the teachers' routine. The best way to do this seemed to be to approach the teachers in person, with the intention of providing a personal contact that demonstrated the goodwill of the researcher and the gallery. The public relations officer for the school district was contacted to (1) obtain his permission and support for a survey and (2) ask his suggestions for how the survey could be conducted. He offered enthusias- t ic support for the undertaking and suggested three ways in which i t could be accomplished. The f i rst was to contact the art helping teacher and sol ici t support and interviewees through her contacts. This idea was rejected because using her contacts would probably be using teachers who were already enthusiastic about art encounters for their students. In effect, i t would be biasing results. The second approach would be to contact the elementary school superintendent to explore the possibility of setting up a workshop for teachers. Our survey would be used as an introduction to a session we would give on gallery use for the classroom teacher. This would be a good idea to use in the future, but for the immediate time would require organization and a time that was not pos- sible for this study. The last suggestion was to contact individual principals and ask to talk with their staff at a staff meeting or at a lunch hour session. This would give a good cross-section of teacher attitudes by providing contact with teachers from various grade levels and subject orientation. We chose to do this. Two principals were called and both welcomed the project. One prin- cipal offered a staff meeting for the survey, to take the form of a dis- 42 cussion guided by a questionnaire. He later had to change this invita- tion to an informal presentation to the staff at a lunch hour because of an unexpected priority for his staff meeting agenda. The other principal had very full agendas for the next few staff meetings but welcomed a noon hour v is i t . The schools were chosen for reasons outlined below. One school was close to the Surrey Arts Center and therefore had no transportation dif- f iculties to deal with for visits to the Gallery. Several, but not a l l , teachers at this school used the workshop programs offered by the Gal- lery. This group of teachers would be able to give information about their use of the programs as well as why teachers in schools close to the gallery would not use the gallery. The second school was outside of walking distance, so had to deal with transportation problems in trip planning. It was a school that had sent one or two classes to the gal- lery in the past but not in the last two years. This teacher group might have very different opinions about the gallery and using its programs. By this selection of schools i t was hoped that the opinions of teachers from a variety of situations would be represented, with emphasis on teachers who do not use the programs. Because i t seemed unfair to ask the teachers' help in providing in- formation for the study without offering anything in exchange, i t was decided to exchange information. The Surrey Art Gallery art educator was invited to join the meeting, to give information about the gallery pro- grams, to help answer the teachers' queries and to address their com- ments. Because both meetings were to be staffroom, lunch time meetings, and thus quite informal with teachers coming and going to supervisions, les- 43 son preparations, etc. , i t was decided to distribute the questions that were to be asked in questionnaire form so that the teachers could answer them while they ate and not lose their relaxation time. Unfortunately this form of interview did not allow for the spontaneity of discussion that would have come from a group discussion but i t did give each teacher the opportunity to participate. While they were f i l l ing out the forms and chatting, we could chat with individuals in an informal way and answer any questions that arose. The f i rst school visited was the school that was close to the Arts Center and sent several classes to the workshop programs. Thirteen teachers came to the lunchroom to participate and f i l led out question- naires. I introduced the project and thanked them for their help before I distributed questionnaires. The gallery education officer spoke with the group a l i t t le later, while teachers worked on the questionnaire and ate their lunches. The atmosphere was relaxed and while the teachers carried on their social discussions among themselves, they took efforts to answer the questions thoroughly. We noticed that gallery publicity had reached the school and was displayed in the staffroom (for the ques- tionnaire used, see Appendix 4). The teachers were f i rst asked where they lived. This was in order to ascertain whether their opinions might reflect those of the community. The staff of the Art Gallery, as has been mentioned, is composed almost entirely of people who live outside of the Surrey district and thus are putting together programs for a community in which they do not l ive. The teachers may represent and reflect the attitudes of that community be- cause they live in i t and are in constant contact with the children and parents of that community. Their comments may reflect views of the gal- 44 lery, typical of members of the community. These may be different from what gallery staff perceive them to be. Only six of this staff lived outside of the district. Of those, five lived very close and in similar communities and one lived in Vancouver, where most of the gallery staff live, so, as a group, these people are perhaps more representative of the community than gallery staff. When planning field trips, most of the staff of this school indica- ted that they chose destinations that fitted into their classroom stu- dies, usually the science or social studies curriculum. They planned an average of two trips a year to such places as the Planetarium, Fort Lang- ley, the Arts, Science and Technology Center, Stanley Park and local bus- inesses (bakeries, grocery stores, etc.) to complement their "what do people do in the community" focus for primary and intermediate social studies. Art is a part of all of the classroom programs of these teachers and all but one of them enjoy teaching art. The one who does not enjoy the experience cites the failure of some lessons and lack of experience as reasons. Of the others, five felt that they had all the training they need for the present although all but two had only art education within teacher training as art background. The other two also had some courses that they had taken for their own interest. None of the teachers indica- ted that they dealt with art history, art appreciation or visual literacy lessons with their classes. Instead they relied on the usual array of elementary school art projects—drawing, colouring, crafts, manipulating paper, puppet making, etc.—occasionally using such activity to 'enrich' social studies or science. It is curious that three of the teachers did not see a relation 45 between a visit to an art gallery and curriculum, although one takes her class there anyway. For her, the gallery excursion is merely a special event, an outing planned as a 'fun' trip, not one considered to be an important part of the children's studies. All but four of the surveyed group have taken their students to a workshop at the gallery and only two were unaware of the programs offered. The program users were all pleased with the programs at the Surrey Art Gallery. These responses were, I hope, not coloured by the fact that the Gallery Education officer from that gallery was right in front of the group. I stressed to them that I encouraged candid criticism as that was the only way I could formulate recommendations that would lead to stronger programs suited to their needs. An interesting comment made by one of the teachers was that he felt 'more art education needs to be done before this community will arrive at the gallery having much (background and art education to understand) your regular exhibitions'. When I asked him to elaborate further, he explain- ed that he felt the community members as a whole did not have enough background to be able to enjoy and understand many of the exhibitions. This from a member of that community! This surely is encouragement for the gallery to assert itself with art education programs for the children (the future Surrey) and adults, teachers among them. If, as this teacher believes, the community that financially supports the gallery and should be its primary users has difficulty dealing with the contemporary gallery exhibitions, the gallery should respond with programs to help develop critical skills and give information. Gallery staff are presently in the process of developing a number of different ways to communicate with the casual visitor, offering them information to help deal with the exhibi- 46 tions. Information in the form of a didactic panel introducing the exhi- bition and a short, easy to read essay about the work and a self-guided tour are already available. By the end of the summer of 1983, there will also be a page of suggestions for gallery games that parents can play with their children at the gallery and a slide/tape presentation to bal- ance and complement the written material. According to the gallery edu- cation and events coordinator, these are all attempts to reach those who do not participate in the gallery's organized programs such as the Sunday talks and films. These teachers indicated that they would seek 'good art' in such varied places as Paris, the Vancouver Art Gallery, private galleries and downtown galleries. Only a couple mentioned their local public gallery (the Surrey Art Gallery) and one finds art 'almost everywhere'. I think i t is often the opinion of 'non-city' dwellers that they have to go to a large center to find good collections or exhibitions of art. It is hard to convince them that a gallery in their midst could also offer 'good' art. Perhaps art loses some of its romance i f i t is that easily acces- sible. These teachers' suggestions for future programming repeatedly called for programs related to the curriculum and appropriate for specific grade levels. One teacher specified that the programs should offer something that he could not provide his class. It seemed that what these teachers felt they couldn't provide was the 'non-doing' aspects of art education, as they all requested teacher workshops in art appreciation and relating art topics to curriculum. Curiously though, what they wanted for their students was activity oriented workshops—printmaking, pottery and paint- ing workshops. This seems to be an inconsistency. While they want one 47 thing for themselves they expect the gallery to do something entirely different for the children. What they want for the children does not uti l ize the most important expertise of the gallery staff—ways of rela- ting to art through their exhibitions and learning to 'look' at them. These teachers seem not to see the relationship between crit ical and his- toric activity and the doing aspects of art. We know from the work edu- cators such as Mary Erikson (Note 4) with her art games that appreciation can and does involve 'doing 1 . Do these teachers? The response to the survey at the second school was not as positive as the f i rs t . This school did not use the gallery at present, perhaps because the gallery poster was not in evidence on their information board and only four said they were even vaguely aware of the program offered. Only seven responded to the questionnaire, the others in the staff room, approximately five, indicating they had supervisions or lesson prepara- tions to do, were not interested or believed that the survey was not applicable to their situation. Several did not show up at the meeting. This session, the Gallery Educator gave the introduction to our visit and outlined the gallery programs before I expressed my purposes and plea for help. This was, for my purposes, a tactical error as several teachers left as soon as they got the information they wanted from Ms. Kolt. The more successful approach for me was to save the dispensing of information until after the questionnaire had been completed, when i t would not bias the responses of the group. The promise of information to come after the questionnaire may encourage the interviewees to participate with their contribution of information. This group of teachers, all Surrey and area residents, took their children to the same sorts of places as the other group, although more 48 mentioned recreational sports trips (skating and skiing), apparently a priority for that school. The planetarium was popular for its special, and professionally produced, program for the primary grades. The teach- ers' bi-annual trips were usually planned to complement socials or sci- ence curriculum, but could also be called a 'special event', unrelated to a particular classroom activity. The larger part of this group did not see how a visi t to an art gallery would be related to curriculum, espe- cially for the primary grades. Again, art training for this group was limited to that received in teacher training. One teacher admitted to having no art training and, further, that he did not enjoy teaching art because he found i t diff icult to come up with ideas. The others all expressed pleasure in teaching art as the children enjoyed i t . However these teachers were somewhat reti- cent to indicate what they did in art classes. The displays in the school indicated a lot of feltpen drawing and colouring, 'crafts' and a great deal of construction paper cutting and pasting (there were many green construction paper dragons, all very similar in design). All of the teachers admitted they needed more art training. They indicated that the gallery could help with this training with teacher workshops for art appreciation. Three wanted workshops on relating art to the rest of the curriculum and two on using the gallery. Once again, for their students, they wanted programs based on studio sk i l ls . These teachers, as did the others, expressed the desire to see more children's art displayed at the gallery. In fact, the gallery had a large exhibition of Japanese child- ren's art in the fall of 1982 and presently, March, 1983, have an impres- sive show of Surrey High School student art in the theatre gallery. The sampling for this survey proved to be quite small, twenty teach- 49 ers, but because there 'was a consistency in their remarks, i t is felt that those surveyed represent the opinions of the majority of Surrey teachers. The study raises several questions. The f i rst pertains to the con- ducting of such a survey. It was unfortunate that both of the school visits ended up being informal lunch hour meetings. While the format provided an informal atmosphere for chatting and gave every teacher the opportunity to express his/her opinions, i t infringed on the teachers' relaxing, eating and social time in a busy day, an infringement that may lessen teachers' interest and willingness to participate. It also serves to make the intruding researcher feel somewhat uncomfortable. Perhaps the more controlled staff meeting atmosphere would be a better forum for gaining teachers' attention and support. All of the teachers were eager to use .all of the field trip time made available to them and were concerned that most of the activities that they chose to do provided enrichment for their regular classroom studies. They were conscious of choosing activities that were curriculum motivated, mostly in the science and social studies area. Many teachers stated that they did not see that an art gallery v is i t f i l led the criter- i a , especially for the primary grades. The teachers, on the whole, did not seem to understand the importance of visual literacy or art apprecia- tion activity in helping the young child, or adult, to learn to 'look' at and 'assess' not only art, but all the visual phenomenon. Visual l i ter- acy or 'aesthetic l i teracy', as art educator Vincent Lanier phrases i t , is for Lanier and many other educators, what the primary purpose of art education should be (Lanier,1980,p.l9). These teachers, responsible for the art education of elementary school children, are all but ignoring 50 t h i s paramount f a c e t of a r t education. They seem to be p r e s e n t i n g t h e i r students with a r t experiences that are e n t i r e l y focused on the 'doing' s k i l l s and not the 'looking' s k i l l s i n v i s u a l experience. There i s a r e a l need to help teachers reassess t h i s way of regarding a r t education and to give them some guidance towards a new approach. Barbara Newson, i n support of g a l l e r y e f f o r t s i n teacher education, says t h a t 'to o f f e r more than enrichment r e q u i r e s the p a r t n e r s h i p of teachers who have become convinced of the importance of the a r t museum ( g a l l e r y ) as an educational resource and who have learned how to use i t ' (Newson,1978,p.263). Teachers, as well as c h i l d r e n , must ' l e a r n to see by doing' (Newson,!978,p.271) so that they no longer see studio a c t i v i - t i e s as d i v o r c e d from the h i s t o r i c and c r i t i c a l aspects of d e a l i n g with a r t , both i n g a l l e r i e s and that of t h e i r own c r e a t i o n . Some of the school d i s t r i c t s have responded to the need f o r teacher education i n t h i s o r i e n t a t i o n by using the g a l l e r y as an i n i t i a l resource f o r a c u r r i c u l u m p r o j e c t . In Richmond, B r i t i s h Columbia (Note 3 ) , i t was n o t i c e d t h a t teachers d i d not t a l k 'about' a r t with t h e i r students. I n i t i a l l y , s t a f f from the Vancouver A r t G a l l e r y took works from the per- manent c o l l e c t i o n to schools and encouraged c h i l d r e n and teachers to t a l k about what they were seeing. These g a l l e r y l e d d i s c u s s i o n s i l l u s t r a t e d t o teachers various c r i t i c a l and a n a l y t i c methods t h a t they could use i n l e a d i n g t h e i r own c l a s s d i s c u s s i o n s . T h i s experience l e a d to a teacher developed c u r r i c u l u m l i n k i n g a r t a p p r e c i a t i o n with w r i t t e n e x p r e s s i o n . U n f o r t u n a t e l y , t h i s example i s a rare one. In other school d i s t r i c t s , help with a r t education comes only i n the form of 'how to' handouts and workshops f o r v a r i o u s s t u d i o p r o j e c t s . In those d i s t r i c t s , the g a l l e r y c o u l d take a much more a c t i v e r o l e i n teacher education with the d i s - 51 t r ic t . Galleries should not only be able to give information about their collection but illustrate how to use the collection and exhibitions to provide maximum, longlasting experience for the children. The Surrey Art Gallery Education Officer agrees with the conclusions drawn from the survey with Surrey teachers. She comments 'We are sincere in asking for opinions (from teachers)--we want to make our programs as good as we possibly can'. However, past attempts at involving teachers have been dif f icult because teachers' time is very limited. As a result, teacher help has been only in terms of verifying the relevance of pro- posed workshops to the curriculum. She also noted that teachers need something specific to respond to—specific questions, suggestions for solutions to specific problems. The docents for the educational program are now discussing visiting the schools next year, perhaps to do an in- troductory 'looking at art' session with teachers as a means of introduc- ing gallery programs. 52 CHAPTER 4 THE CASE STUDY: THE DEVELOPMENT OF TWO WORKSHOP PROGRAMS The Initiation of a Case Study of the Surrey Art Gallery Educational Program A review of literature in the field of museum education, information gathered from museum educators and interviews with teachers, reveal a number of problems facing museum education department programmers. Those problems, varying from lack of program use to poor funding to space plan- ning, appear to be dominated by one overriding problem—a lack of effec- tive communication and cooperation between museums and schools. Both the museum's staff concern that teachers and classes are not adequately prepared for their museum visi t and teachers' repeated re- quests for information to help them in their classrooms indicate that the focus for future museum programming should be the teacher. Although many museum staff are reluctant to take on the role of teacher trainer that they feel is the responsibility of university teacher training programs, school distr icts, and the teachers, such an endeavour could prove to their advantage. Well prepared teachers would lead to well prepared classes, a greater interest in the museum or gallery as a valuable teach- ing resource, and a more comfortable rapport between teachers and the museum staff. There are many directions that museums could take in planning pro- grams to help teachers. The most direct programs could take the form of teacher workshops to orientate teachers both to the specific programs of the education department and how to use them, and to provide background information about the museum collections. Such programs, offered in the evening, during summer holidays or as professional development day semin- 53 ars would encourage teachers to go back to their schools and try to use the information given to them. However, it is a commonly held theory that one of the best ways to learn is by example. Perhaps that is one of the most effective and effi- cient ways that a museum can approach program development. If a museum can develop programs for the school visitors that show teachers how to integrate the resources of the museum into their curriculum they will be teaching both teachers and students at the same time. The case study that the remainder of this thesis will focus upon was developed in an attempt to apply the above theory. The Surrey Art Gallery education staff wished to have a workshop already in use rewritten and to develop a workshop on a new topic. As already mentioned, the format of the in-gallery workshops for interme- diate elementary school classes consisted of a tour of the current month- ly gallery exhibition followed or preceded by a session in the gallery classrooms involving a lecture and a studio project. Topics of the work- shops were either media focused, such as the clay workshop, or appreci- ation/curriculum focused, such as the Inuit Arts and Culture workshop. This format provides students with both an intense involvement with one topic (the workshop) and direct contact with the art in the exhibitions. Each facet of the program should encourage the children to relate con- cepts learned in one to the other. Ingrid Kolt, the Education and Events Coordinator at the gallery, was faced with a common problem of all small galleries and museums. She was a department of one playing two roles, public events program officer as well as education officer for school programs. With only volunteer help to operate programs and to plan them, the gallery staff find little 54 available time to invest in the lengthy process of creating programs. The gallery could find some funds for paying instructors on a per class basis but not for doing the necessary background work. When a gallery has to rely on volunteers and part time help for such work, it is often difficult to find people with the background in education, art history, studio training and gallery theories and practices which are necessary to develop good programs. If a gallery cannot afford to hire staff with the above qualifica- tions, it must be creative in how it goes about finding funding that could facilitate specific projects such as program writing. If the gal- lery can forecast its needs in terms of specific projects to be com- pleted, they have more options for finding funding. They may contract the work to a freelance writer who may be a student, a teacher, a person who has left the gallery or teaching field to be at home, or someone working part-time elsewhere. In addition, they can take advantage of the numerous government grants that are offered for summer student employ- ment, community development projects, arts projects or projects for people on Unemployment Insurance Benefits. Such grants will usually pro- vide money to pay people to carry out projects that have been proposed by either the sponsoring institution or the people to be employed, and deem- ed worthwhile by the government department offering the grants. Usually the grants will provide only a minimal salary for the people hired, but often this salary can be supplemented by the gallery and its funders to make it more attractive to the best qualified candidates. Such was the case with the Surrey Art Gallery. The Gallery applied for and was granted money through the British Columbia Ministry of Labour Student Employment Program. The terms of the grant were that a student 55 be hired for a period of about two and a half months to carry out the projects proposed by the Education and Events Coordinator. Because the grant provided only for a minimal wage, the gallery received additional support from the Municipality of the District of Surrey, which operates the gallery, to bring the salary up to the level of programmers in other recreation departments of the municipality. This funding cleared the way for the Surrey Art Gallery to be able to sponsor this researcher. My background in art history, studio prac- t ice, teaching and a long standing interest in gallery programming, qual- i f ied me as a candidate for the project. My major responsibility was to develop new workshops that could be put into regular use by the gallery. These workshops would combine the perceived needs and a basic format re- quired by the gallery staff with the ideas of the researcher. By working in an environment such as this where a researcher is developing work for a real situation the chances of the product being viable are greater than i f the researcher is working entirely on his/her own with no obligation to the gallery to create something that they will use. Conversely, the researcher is also guaranteed that his/her work will be used and there- fore available for ongoing evaluation of its effectiveness. Thus i t came about that I was able to set up a working relationship with an art gallery to test ideas that were formulated as a result of the preliminary studies undertaken. The gallery goals were that new programs maintain their present workshop format, with the addition of a pre-visit package, and (1) connect visual arts with other areas of curriculum (especially social studies) and (2) provide the students with an active experience. Using these requirements as a framework, I could test my ideas of using gallery programs to provide teacher education by inter- 56 relating 'art' topics with other curriculum areas and developing the c r i - t ical and historical aspects of art education. Although the gallery was only able to pay for the time spent in actual workshop development and the occasional subsequent teaching of the workshops after the summer grant expired, they were able to take advantage of the research and eval- uation done by the researcher free of charge. This is a point that any gallery or museum should consider, that is by interesting a graduate stu- dent in specific, testable projects they will eventually have access to a very complete study for a relatively small financial investment. The Programs As a result of funding being approved for the Education Department of the Surrey Art Gallery, the Gallery hired me to develop a new workshop for their schools program and to revamp an already offered workshop. These workshops were to be developed so that they satisfied gallery re- quirements for their already established program format as well as my own concerns for the needs of gallery educational programming. The requirements set out for the workshops can be divided into two groups. The f i rst stemmed from my concerns for the art education merits of the materials and the second concerned more specific goals relating to their use. The Art Gallery, by its nature as a place where works are put on display for people to look at and assess, is concerned mainly with the aesthetics and visual literacy components of art education, that is help- ing people to be able to look at and understand and assess visual pheno- menon (Lanier,1980,p.88). In essence, the galleries' concern is with the perception, rather than the production of art. A gallery education .pro- gram should thus be sure that i t offers the students the opportunity to 57 develop their perception skills. These skills, as CM. Smith points out, can best be promoted through (1) facilitating increasingly more sensitive discrimination of aesthetic qualities through guided encounters with works of art, (2) instruction in critical evaluative procedures, and (3) providing for sufficient understanding of the historical and cultural context of art (Smith,1970,p.44). These three goals must be included in the Surrey Art Gallery workshops for them to qualify as art education in the realm of the development of visual literacy. The second group of requirements are concerned with the researcher's interest in gallery education programs as a vehicle to educate the teach- er in art education and the gallery's philosophy. These are that the workshop packages to be developed: (1) provide a 'draw' for teachers because of their relevance to school curriculum, (2) show teachers ways to introduce 'art' topics into the curricula of art and other subjects, therefore using a subject area that the teacher may be more familiar and confident as touchstones for teaching art, (3) provide enough useful in- formation to the teacher, without being condescending, to help the teach- er in these times when they already feel over-extended, (4) be adaptable to many grade levels, (5) be adaptable enough that teachers can expand or refocus the information to fit their specific program, and (6) be adapt- able enough that gallery staff could present the whole workshop at the schools if budget restraints forbid field trips. The Inuit: Arts and Culture workshop was the first to be developed. The Gallery already had an Inuit workshop as a part of their program, but it was felt that this workshop needed to be reworked. The original work- shop had been developed by a gallery instructor who had no training as a teacher or in art although she has an active interest in the arts. This 58 instructor did an admirable job in researching the Inuit l i festyle, se- lecting slides and artifacts to use in the workshop, and, learning a printmaking technique to include as the 'hands-on' aspect of the work- shop. But the workshop lacked both focus and substance. Because the instructor, as she admitted, lacked confidence in dealing with 'art' topics, the arts of the Inuit were not explored in the workshop in suffi- cient depth. This is probably a problem faced by many smaller galleries who must depend on their volunteers for putting together program materi- al s. It was decided that i t was important to keep the Inuit workshop, in a new form, because i t was popular with the teachers. With its focus on an indigenous, Canadian cultural group, i t f i t well into the junior and intermediate social studies curriculum. What was needed was more infor- mation for teachers to add to what they already taught their students from social studies texts, material that dealt with the products of Inuit culture not just as artifacts but as art forms. The second workshop was a totally new one. The gallery wanted a workshop that dealt specifically with Canadian art history. Students were to be given background information that would help them deal with the gallery exhibitions which-are largely Canadian and contemporary. The challenge in the preparation of this workshop was to avoid having i t be- come the dull lecture that the public has often come to associate with art history. In addition to providing a fresh approach to what some might consider a boring topic, i t had to relate to school curriculum. The format of the two workshops was to a certain extent dictated by the gallery staff who wanted to stay with a classroom presentation and project, followed or preceded by a tour of the current exhibition. While 59 this format provided the children with an extensive experience in the gallery, i t was felt that the experience was suffering because i t was being treated as an experience isolated from the regular routine of the school classroom. The children were not receiving the pre-visit prepara- tion that would help them to be more receptive to the workshop and tour. In addition, they probably were not following up the visit with activi- ties in the classroom which might help to reinforce their experience at the gallery. In order to address these problems, i t was decided to have the new workshops consist of (1) a pre-visit kit to be sent to the teacher prior to the gallery v is i t including (a) slides, (b) script, (c) tape of the script, and (d) student activity sheets, designed to introduce the area to be discussed in the gallery v is i t , (2) the gallery workshop consisting of a talk and slide presentation followed by a studio activity, and (3) post-visit activity suggestions. Despite the fact that many art educators are concerned that the extensive use of slides and reproductions in art classes is having the affect of causing children not to learn to relate to 'real ' paintings when they see them, we chose to use slides for these workshops and ̂ pre- v is i t kits. Certainly slides fail to relate the sense of scale or the impact of texture and colour, but, they are quite simply the best means of introducing the students to works and examples that are not available in a small community gallery such as the Surrey Art Gallery which has no permanent collection. Slides generally provide a truer reproduction than do prints and are much easier for the instructor to handle gracefully than a pile of bulky prints. They are easier to store and less expensive than prints and certainly more portable for lending purposes. When the 60 use of slides is followed up with a hands-on experience with materials and a tour of gallery exhibitions, their negative affects can easily be overcome or lessened. For the pre-visit kits, both a cassette tape of the script for the twenty slides and a printed copy of the tape script were included. The teacher could choose whether he/she wanted a recorded commentary or to have students or herself read the commentary. The ideal situation would be for the teacher and the students to share the narration, with the teacher adding text or emphasis to suit the needs and interests of her particular class. In this way the kit would become personalized and have greater impact. The taped commentary would be useful for the teacher who did not feel confident that he/she had the background to approach the topic covered in the kit on his/her own. No matter which approach the teacher chose to use, the kit would, we hoped, illustrate how a class could be prepared for a v is i t to an art gallery or a museum. This pre- paration in class would not only include the disemi nation of information but activities to reinforce this. These activities should use knowledge gained from the information as well as stimulating vocabulary and obser- vation ski l ls that will help them in the activities planned for the gal- lery. For the exact text of the pre-visit kits and the workshop, see Appendixes 5, 6, 8, and 9. The following paragraphs describe these and discuss the reasons for choosing the various approaches used to handle the topics. As previously stated, the Inuit: Arts and Culture workshop was being redesigned to add more emphasis to the arts aspect of the Inuit culture. The pre-visit package was designed to introduce the students 61 and teachers to the Inuit l i festyle. The package, as does the pre-visit package for the Canadian art workshop, begins with a checklist of the contents of the kit so that the teacher can check immediately that all is included. If the kit is missing any parts, the gallery staff would quickly arrange to have the missing part supplied. Following this l i s t is an introduction to the teacher. This introduction gives the teacher information she will need when planning the class such as an estimated length of time needed and the equipment needed for the presentation. It tel ls briefly what the material in the kit covers and what topics will be covered in the in-gallery workshop. Step by step instructions for how to use the kit follow. The teacher introduction ends with instructions for the return of the kit and an invitation for comments about i t . All of these components are combined and bound into a duo-tang cover, with the slides in order in a plastic sleeve, so that the 'kit ' is f lat for mail- ing and has no loose parts to be easily lost. Several considerations had to be made regarding the format of the teacher introduction and instructions. It had to be taken into account that teachers have hectic schedules and not a lot of time to read copious instructions. The text of these must be concise, clear and laid out in such a way that a quick scan would answer most of their questions. Many teachers seem to feel alienated from gallery staff because of what they perceive to be an academic elitism due to the gallery staffs' greater knowledge of the topics concerned with their collections. To try to pre- vent that attitude arising, the tone of the teacher instruction should be informative without being condescending in any manner. The instruction sheet should reflect that the gallery staff are aware of the confines on the teachers' time and the questions he/she may have about organizing 62 this particular class. As a teacher, I recall my frustrations upon re- ceiving a package of information prepared by an art gallery for me to use with my class. It was so lacking in organization, instructions or sug- gestions for its use, that i t required more time for me to put together a plan for its use than i f I had researched and gathered the information myself. I have also received instruction l ists that sounded as though they were written for the use of a grade three student instead of a well educated teacher. The kits that I prepared tried to avoid both of these situations. As the intention of the pre-visit kit (see Appendix 5) is to provide the students and teachers with background information to prepare them for the gallery workshop, the Inuit kit focuses on aspects of the Inuit cul- ture. The Inuit are discussed in terms of how their culture (up until the 1950's) was influenced by the climate in which they lived, the vege- tation and wildlife in the region, the isolation of their communities from the rest of the world and their very rare contact with Europeans. Housing, transportation, clothing, hunting and fishing techniques, re l i - gion and the roles of the family members are discussed. The presentation ends with mention of how the last two and a half decades has seen a dra- matic change in the culture of these people. The slides that were selec- ted are mostly photographs of the Inuit l i festyle. We chose to use only twenty slides as they f i t neatly into a plastic slide sleeve, and, i l lus- trate to the teacher that they do not need a great number of slides to put together an effective preparation lesson. Consultation with the Surrey School District social studies helping teacher, indicated that this was the sort of information that the teach- ers used in teaching the unit on the Inuit that is a part of the inter- 63 mediate curriculum. It could thus act as either a review for the stu- dents or as an introduction both to that unit of study and the gallery workshop. The activity sheet which accompanies the kit includes a variety of activit ies: vocabulary search, written work, interpretation of diagrams and photographs. These activities could be used either at intervals throughout the presentation as suggested in the instructions, or all to- gether after the presentation. Done during the presentation, they would provide breaks in the deluge of information and prevent wandering atten- tion in a room darkened for slides. Used in this manner they would also serve to reinforce ideas being discussed at that point in the commentary. The children might be frustrated trying to remember everything that they need for the activities after the whole presentation. At the gallery, the students are taken to one of the classrooms where they will have a slide presentation with simultaneous discussion, followed by a studio project—lino block printing. The presentation (see Appendix 6) given by a gallery instructor who had designed the workshop used by the gallery before this study, focuses on the arts of the Inuit. It discusses how they were a part of traditional Inuit culture, tradi- tional l ifestyle and how they have helped the Inuit to cope with their new situation. Using slides of the drawings of an Inuit art ist , Pitseolk, i l lustra- ting her l i fe as a young woman in the earlier part of the century, the presentation opens with a review of the traditional Inuit culture. If the students have gone through the pre-visit package, this provides a review and gives them confidence as they are able to provide most of the information themselves. If the class had not had the opportunity to pre- 64 pare this introduction provides them with background information they will need to appreciate and understand the rest of the workshop. The rest of the workshop deals with (1) the fibre arts, (2) sculp- ture, and (3) printmaking. The script of the presentation purposely pro- vides much more information than could be used within the forty-five minutes allowed for i t . The reasons for this are: (1) to provide enough information that the instructor can focus on any one of the arts which the teacher of the class wishes to emphasize to enhance his classroom work, and (2) to provide information that could be used i f the presenta- tion were to be given at the school or to the public where more time would be available. Printmaking will usually be the particular focus be- cause the studio activity is a printmaking one. At various times during the presentation, the instructor will have the students examine various objects of the Inuit culture: clothing, tools and sculpture materials which the gallery has on loan from the government of the Northwest Terri- tories. In this section of the workshop, the students are introduced not only to the techniques used by the Inuit to produce their work, but to the formal qualities inherent in the work which we use to discuss any work of art. The instructor points out that the art of the Inuit is unique to that group and that this is because of their traditional way of l i f e and because of developments in the North during the past twenty-five years. Since the studio activity for this workshop is lino block printing, the students are shown how to make a simple lino print and how this tech- nique is quite similar to that used for the Inuit stone cuts. The stu- dents then have the opportunity to produce a small print. As motivation 65 for selecting their image, the students are told the story of Sedna, the sea goddess, a very popular subject for the Inuit artists. In choosing their image and planning their design, the students are encouraged to remember to use the formal considerations that we find in Inuit p r in ts - lack of background, a radial or a radiating pattern, simple shapes and large areas of flat colour. As there is only forty-five minutes allowed for the studio activity, the students can only produce a small print. However, they and their teacher receive enough information and experience that they could work on more complex prints in lino technique back in their classroom. It would be possible and appropriate to choose a sculpture or fibre art project to do in this. workshop instead of the print activity. We chose to use the printmaking because the gallery had the equipment needed and the instructor was familiar with the technique. It was also possible to produce a print in the time allowed, and teachers had shown enthusiasm for the activity when i t was used in earlier Inuit workshops. Sculpture and fibre arts activities would be dif f icult to complete in forty-five minutes and would require the purchase of new supplies and equipment beyond the capabilities of the budget. When the class completes the workshop, the teacher is given a sheet with ideas for activities they can do with their class when they return to their school (Appendix 7). It was felt that i t was most important that the gallery workshop be followed up in the classroom with some re- lated activity so that the students receive reinforcement of what they learned at the gallery. It is dif f icult to know how extensive to make the follow-up suggestions. Discussion with the education staff at the Art Gallery of Ontario indicated that of the various methods they have 66 used to present follow-up ideas, the most successful seemed to be a l is t of just a few ideas with a brief description of how to do each activity. They found that i f the teachers were given any more than a page of ideas they tended not to read i t because i t gave the impression that follow-up was too complex. If only one idea was given, teachers ignored i t as i t seemed that the gallery was telling them that i t was the only good follow-up idea, better than their own might be. Following this advice, we decided to put together a l i s t of a few ideas that the teacher might use or expand upon for further studies in the classroom. These sugges- tions offer new studio ideas as well as ideas integrating art and social studies activit ies. This permits the teacher to use them to the best advantage of his/her classroom curriculum, whether i t be in art class or in social studies. The format of the second workshop, Seeing Ourselves Through Art, a look at the painting tradition in Canada, is essentially the same as that for the Inuit workshop. The same format of a pre-visit kit followed by an 'at-the-gallery' class and studio project and follow-up class sugges- tions, was selected so that the workshops were standardized. Teachers would thus know the 'routine' and what to expect when they booked another workshop subsequent to their f i rst v is i t . This standardization would help the teacher prepare his/her class for the excursion. The gallery staff had decided that they wanted a workshop dealing with Canadian art history but they had not chosen a focus for the work- shop. My proposal to use figure painting as a trend to trace through Canada's history was accepted. We found that the social studies curricu- lum for the elementary grades focuses not on a names and dates approach to learning about our heritage, but on a 'peoples' approach. People are 67 studied as family groups, as communities, as ethnic groups and as indi- viduals. We thus decided that pictures with people in them would be interesting to the children and fit into this philosophy. One difficulty with this curriculum seems to be that often the children do not get a wholistic picture of our history. For our workshop we decided to use a chronological approach to presenting the material so that the children might get a sense of the whole and of the stages of development in both Canada and its art. Because the Surrey Art Gallery has no permanent collection and usu- ally has quite avant; garde exhibitions, they do not have many ways of i l - lustrating the traditions of art history which have led to the kinds of art being done today. Often we need a sense of that tradition in order to understand and appreciate more recent work. Canada, having a rela- tively short art tradition must look to the art of other countries and cultures to find some of its roots. For this reason, the pre-visit pack- age for this workshop (see Appendix 8) attempts to present students and teachers with a very brief overview of the tradition of figure painting in western art. Of course it is impossible to cover this topic in any depth with twenty slides and ten pages of script. But it is possible to give an impression of why artists in past centuries painted pictures of people and some of the stylistic changes that occurred. It offers a ve- hicle to introduce some of the vocabulary used when discussing figure painting, such as commission, portrait, profile, represent, etc. The period covered in this kit ends in the 1800's in Europe. This was the time at which Canada was beginning to have artists of her own and it was from Europe that most Canadian artists and settlers came. For the com- plete text of this package, see Appendix 8. 68 The activity sheet designed to accompany this package has activities that reinforce the vocabulary and explore a major development in art his- tory, the use of perspective. It also explores a particular type of f ig- ure painting, the Egyptian tomb painting. Again, these activities show the teacher that art related activities do not have to be only studio activities but can branch into other curriculum areas such as language, mathematics and social studies. The activities include a vocabulary study, a perspective exercise using simple geometry and an examination of an art form of another culture. They also illustrate some motivation ideas for studio activit ies, such as for the 'Egyptian' activity. To do this kit , as with the Inuit ki t , a teacher would need at least an average class time, forty-five minutes. Although using the informa- tion given as a foundation, the teacher could probably spread the lesson over several class periods. With a busy schedule imposed by school cur- ricula and activit ies, the teacher often does not have much more than one class to be able to devote to the kit , or to any sort of preparation for a field tr ip. The introduction to the Seeing Ourselves Through Art workshop best expresses what I wanted to do in this workshop: 'In this workshop we will look at pictures of people done by Canadian artists. The work of these artists has much to tell us about art ists, the traditions that are behind their work, the lives of the people in the pictures and the his- tory of Canada as a nation of people—native people and people who came here from other lands. Canadian art came out of the traditions of Euro- pean art, such as that which you saw in your classroom presentation, and gradually became something special to Canada.' (For the exact text of the workshop, see Appendix 9). The workshop explores these points through 69 slides of paintings from Canada's early times to today. These are pre- sented chronologically in order that the students will get a sense of the progression of both Canadian art and Canada's history. While the script for this workshop may seem prescriptive, i t is meant only as a guide to what the instructor should say with each slide. It is not intended that the instructor should conduct this portion of the workshop as a lecture, but more as a guided discussion with the students, el icit ing as much par- ticipation from the children as possible. Throughout the script there are places where the instructor can stop the class to conduct various activit ies, exploring the points being made in the text. Such activities give the instructor a break and the children a chance to move around and be more active. They also point out to the teacher some ways that she could use other methods besides lectures and research projects to study art history and art theory. I have suggested ways to use theatre exer- cises and photography as tools to explore some of the concepts. In order for an instructor to complete everything in the workshop script, she would need more than the forty-five minutes allotted by the gallery. However, as i t is designed, the workshop can be adapted to the special interests of a particular group by thoughtful editing by the in- structor. In its entirety, i t would be most suitable for use as a public workshop, with or without the studio portion, where more time could be allotted. Also, in the event that this workshop should be offered to the schools as an 'at the school' event, conducted by either gallery.staff or the classroom teacher, the script in its entirety could be spread over several class periods. It could be used as a half day or all day acti- vity or broken up over several days. Another problem that had to be ad- dressed in deciding just how extensive the scripts should be was the pro- 70 blem that the gallery docent or instructor conducting the workshop may have a weak background in Canadian art history. It would then be neces- sary to provide that person with enough information to give them some confidence with the subject. When trying to develop a studio activity to be a part of this work- shop, the obvious choice of medium was painting as we had been dealing with painted works. However, within the confines of forty-five minutes, this seemed an impractical project. Also that medium, or drawing, are probably the most commonly used in the classroom. Because a part of our purpose in putting these workshops together is to show teachers some new approaches to handling art education, I wanted to avoid using a studio idea they most probably already used. In addition, I wanted to do a pro- ject which would help the students, and the teachers, deal with the con- cept of abstraction, one that arises often in the gallery exhibitions and one that it is often the most difficult to deal with. The project I decided to use was doing an abstract self-portrait—a portrait about the individual students rather than a portrait of how the students looked. Children, in the primary grades especially, seem to en- joy using art to tell about their feelings. In support of this concept, Ronald MacGregor says that " . . . art is a means to express what we feel about events, personalities, and states of mind . . . artmaking . . . per- mits us to focus upon those things we feel most intensely . . . By realiz- ing that they construct and interpret their world partly in response to the way they feel about it , children can learn to be more understanding of the other peoples' point of view, and more sensitive to their own" (MacGregor,1977,p.7). To compose about feelings about themselves is a good introduction to the concept of abstraction. I chose to use torn 71 tissue paper as the medium because it required relatively little equip- ment, the colours are vivid and attractive to the children, tearing the paper encourages the children to think in terms of large shapes and pat- terns rather than intricate detail, and, it is possible to achieve a fin- ished product in the time allotted. In addition, it is a technique easi- ly grasped by children of all age groups. The follow-up ideas that were put together to give the teachers for this workshop, were similar in nature to those developed for the Inuit workshop (See page 65 describing the Inuit workshop for our rationale be- hind our follow-up suggestions, and Appendix 10 for the l ist of follow-up suggestions for this workshop). 72 CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND EVALUATION Testing and Evaluating the Program The workshops described in the last chapter were tested and evalua- ted in a number of ways by people with several different orientations. The first group of evaluators was Surrey Art Gallery staff—the gal- lery education officer, the curators and the director. This group provi- ded on-going evaluation of the material as it was being prepared. This evaluation, both in verbal comments, in committee meetings and in nota- tion on drafts, was mainly concerned with the specific content of the workshops—the choice of slides, the accuracy of art historical informa- tion and analysis, and the coherence of the text. In addition, gallery staff evaluated the workshops as they were being presented to classes. Teachers who used the workshop programs were also asked to evaluate the materials and their experiences with them. This evaluation was by questionnaire and by informal discussion. The third group of evaluators is the instructors who actually taught the workshops. Because I taught the Seeing Ourselves Through Art work- shop, this is partly a self evaluation of the success and adaptability of the materials. The other workshop was taught by another instructor who had taught the previous Inuit workshop. She compared the relative suc- cess of the two approaches to the same topic. Final evaluation was my own evaluation of not only the workshop I taught, but the other as well. I was able to sit in and observe the Inuit workshop both for how well the instructor was able to use the ma- terials prepared for her and for the response of the students and teacher to the workshop. 73 As mentioned, prior to final drafting of the workshop text and ma- terials, the gallery staff met with me to offer their comments and advice about the materials that I had selected. For the Inuit workshop this was most helpful because the gallery director had much more knowledge about Inuit arts than I did. On the whole, the group supported my choices as offering a good survey of images representing the major developments in Canadian art and representative pieces of quality Inuit art. They also thought they were successful vehicles for illustrating events and l i fe - styles in Canada, and for exploring a variety of important art apprecia- tion concepts. It was felt that the script lead the children through several different approaches to 'looking' at and learning from and about art. The conclusion was that I had, in the selection of slides and ac- companying text, satisfied CM. Smith's guidelines for developing percep- tual skil ls (see the preceding section for these). The only problem in dealing with this committee was editing their enthusiastic suggestions for additions to the script, which, had they all been used, would have resulted in a six hour workshop! Because, as a whole, the staff of the gallery have l i t t le experience working with small children, many of their suggestions for changes in both text content and language were inappro- priate for the age group we were serving. This, of course, is a problem many academics face when preparing materials both for children and the general public, and is one that many galleries must face head-on i f they wish to be accessible to the general public. Unfortunately, many academ- ically oriented gallery professionals are reluctant to change their style or approach in order to reach the public. The gallery staff were pleased that the materials satisfied their goals of providing some background and an introduction to crit ical and 74 evaluative skills which would help students deal with the type of exhibi- tions the gallery prefers. It should also be mentioned that the staff was heartened by the thank you letter written by a grade four student that expressed his intention to bring his family to the Surrey Art Gal- lery. This, after a l l , is one of the gallery's strategies in offering programs for children—getting the children to interest their parents in the gallery (see Appendix 11 for samples of student 'thank yous'). It should also be mentioned that the materials were also reviewed by a teacher with experience teaching all of the grades that we focused on, grades three to six. She had some helpful suggestions for minor changes in language and approaches to the activities, but was enthusiastic about our approach both to the materials and to helping teachers. For teacher evaluation of the workshops they attended with their classes, the questionnaires seen as Appendixes 12 and 13 were used. There were two questionnaires—one for the pre-visit package and the other for the in-gallery workshops. Each teacher was given the question- naire at the beginning of the workshop, by the instructor, with an expla- nation of what it was to be used for. Only one of the eleven teachers surveyed failed to return the questionnaires. First, the response of the teachers to the Inuit Arts and Culture workshop will be examined, followed by responses to the Seeing Ourselves Through Art workshop. Six classes participated in the Inuit workshop in the evaluation period of October and November, 1982. Of these classes, one was a grade four class, three classes were grade five, one was a combined grade six and seven class, and one class was a grade seven group. The pre-visit package of materials was sent to five of the groups. 75 The sixth teacher booked her visit too late for the gallery to be able to send the materials but she did borrow them to use with her class after their gallery v is i t . Four of the five teachers who did receive the mate- rials returned the evaluation questionnaire. Their comments are summar- ized following (for an exact breakdown of their responses, see Appendix 12). The teachers all indicated that they had some background in the subject of the workshop, the Inuit, but only two of the four indicated any background in art, and those two had only a minimal preparation. All of the teachers said that they tried to do a preparation lesson with their class before a field trip but this usually took the form of infor- mation and discussion about the destination of the vis i t rather than the program they would take part in there. All teachers and classes enjoyed using the preparation package and felt that they came to the gallery clear about what would go on there. One teacher expressed surprise that a preparation package was available and, like others, was delighted that this service was offered. The teachers' comments about the contents of the package were most enthusiastic. It was heartening to learn that all of the teachers used the materials as we had hoped, that i s , with the commentary script rather than the taped commentary. In general, the teachers found the length of the presentation to be good, the language appropriate to the grade lev- els, and the text appropriate, helpful, and relevant to the social stud- ies curriculum. The children enjoyed the activity sheets and their teachers were sure that the materials increased their students' enthusi- asm for the upcoming gallery v is i t . The teachers only offered two c r i t i - cisms. The f i rst was that they would have liked more art activit ies. It should be noted that i t was not the intention of the pre-visit package to 76 deal with the a r t s of the I n u i t . I t i s only meant as an i n t r o d u c t i o n to I n u i t c u l t u r e , p r i o r to the g a l l e r y s e ssion which focuses on the a r t s . The second c r i t i c i s m was that there needed to be more s l i d e s . While i t would be good to put more s l i d e s i n the package, we f e l t t h a t i t was too expensive to provide more than one sleeve of s l i d e s , a l s o the r i s k s of l o s s or damage to the s l i d e s would be g r e a t e r i f there were more. I t must be remembered that we had to put' together f i v e complete copies of the p a c k a g e — f o u r to c i r c u l a t e and one to be kept as a m a s t e r — a n expen- s i v e undertaking on a small budget. An a d d i t i o n a l sleeve of s l i d e s f o r each k i t would have almost doubled our c o s t s . F i v e of the workshop p a r t i c i p a n t s returned t h e i r comments about the i n - g a l l e r y part of the I n u i t workshop (see Appendix 13). A f t e r having observed t h e i r c l a s s i n t h a t s e s s i o n , they a l l agreed t h a t the prepara- t i o n package had helped t h e i r students to be more r e c e p t i v e to the work- shop than they might have been, or had been, on other f i e l d t r i p s . When questioned about the students' f a m i l i a r i t y with the s u b j e c t of the work- shop, the teachers thought that the m a t e r i a l covered was mostly new to them as was the studio technique ( l i n o block p r i n t i n g ) . On the whole, the teachers l i k e the format of the workshop but i n d i c a t e d t h a t they would l i k e more student p a r t i c i p a t i o n and more time f o r the printmaking. Teacher responses i n d i c a t e t h a t the workshop d e f i n i t e l y enhanced the c l a s s e s ' r e g u l a r programs, and that the teachers would a l l a p p r e c i a t e help that could be given.to them i n the form of follow-up c l a s s sugges- t i o n s , teacher workshops, more k i t s , and classroom v i s i t s by g a l l e r y s t a f f f o r studio l e s s o n s , workshops and a r t a p p r e c i a t i o n s e s s i o n s . A l l i n d i c a t e d t hat i n a d d i t i o n to the obvious b e n e f i t s to the students, they had gained some new i n s i g h t about using a r t i n the classroom. 77 In summary, the teacher response to our workshop, i n c l u d i n g the pre- v i s i t package, was very p o s i t i v e . Perhaps the only s o l u t i o n to t h e i r major c r i t i c i s m t h at there was not enough time f o r student p a r t i c i p a t i o n would be to extend the time a l l o t t e d f o r the workshop to two hours. T h i s would make a very long v i s i t as the whole package a l s o i n c l u d e s a tour of the e x h i b i t i o n s , and many teachers may not be able to spare the extra h a l f hour away from the s c h o o l . The other p o s s i b l e s o l u t i o n would be to reduce the time spent i n the s l i d e - d i s c u s s i o n s e c t i o n . However, t h i s would be most d i f f i c u l t to do without j e o p a r d i z i n g some of the goals of the workshops—those concerned with the development of perceptual s k i l l s . I t i s important to remember t h a t as a g a l l e r y , the mandate to produce ' a r t ' i s secondary to t h a t of examining the a r t of o t h e r s . In t h i s s e t - t i n g , the s t u d i o a c t i v i t y i s used to r e i n f o r c e concepts d i s c u s s e d when examining images by g i v i n g the students the opportunity to explore these concepts through t h e i r own a r t making. A p o i n t t h a t came out very c l e a r l y i n both the e v a l u a t i o n s of t h i s workshop and those of the Seeing Ourselves Through A r t workshop, i s t h a t i t i s the teacher's i n i t i a t i v e t h a t gets a c l a s s to the g a l l e r y , not the suggestions or requirements of the school a d m i n i s t r a t o r s or the school d i s t r i c t . T h i s would i n d i c a t e t h a t i t i s to the i n d i v i d u a l teacher that the g a l l e r y should d i r e c t communication and i n f o r m a t i o n about t h e i r pro- grams. The session of the workshop that I was able to observe was somewhat d i s a p p o i n t i n g to me. As I expressed e a r l i e r , a person who develops a g a l l e r y educational program has to be aware t h a t the program w i l l proba- b l y be taught by someone, a docent or g a l l e r y i n s t r u c t o r , who may not have formal teaching experience or background i n a r t or the s p e c i f i c 78 topic of the workshop. Our solution to this problem was to provide enough information in the suggested text of the workshop that the in- structor is provided with needed background information. The instructor for the Inuit workshop had neither teaching nor art background, and ran into some problems because of this. In addition, as she had also taught and developed the previously used Inuit workshop, she had a routine of several years to forget and re-learn, always a difficult task. I was disappointed that in editing the script to fit into the allotted time, the instructor cut out much of the material that was the purpose of the rewrite of the workshop—direct discussion about the arts of the culture. Instead, over half of the class was spent on material already covered in the pre-visit package. I think this was largely the result of not being able to break an old habit. A solution to this problem would be to have the instructor observe the person who developed the workshop present it and then edit the script, with the help of the programmer. As stated earlier, the script is purposely long so that it can be refocused to media appropriate to the current gallery exhibition. As such, editing should be done by cutting out one or more of the media sections rather than watering all of them down in such a way that the presentation loses impact. The instructor could also learn some teaching 'tricks' by ob- serving a more experienced teacher. This would help her avoid some of the rough spots in style of presentation and make the transition from the slide section to the studio session smoother and more clearer. This instructor is by no means a poor one. She is enthusiastic and personable and, with a little more help, could do a very good job of pre- senting the workshop. The suggestion for help should probably be addres- sed to the gallery (any gallery) who find themselves in the position of 79 using inappropriately prepared instructors for education programs. The extra time must be taken to make sure that the presentation, as inter- preted by the instructor, satisfies all the intentions of the workshop. It must be remembered that this presentation is being given in the pres- ence of an experienced teacher to help not only the children, but the teacher. Embarrassment of the instructor and lessening of the program's worth to the teacher must be avoided. The instructor herself was very pleased with the information that the workshop script provided her with and expressed a wish to be able to use all of i t . Her observations indicate that the presentation was enthusiastically received by the students, as I also observed when sit- ting in on her class. She also supported the teachers in that she saw a difference in the response level between those students who used the pre- visit package and those who did not (see Appendix 14 for more details of the instructor's responses). Finally, the children—what comments did the children have about their experience with the workshops? To take their 'thank you' letters as an indication, it seems they enjoyed the visit and learned some new things as well. Some of these letters are reproduced in Appendix 11, but some of the most encouraging comments were as follows: 'I like the pic- tures you have in your Gallery. I also liked the slides too and how you showed us how to make the pictures.' (Chad Cammer, grade 4); 'All of last summer my friends, Jeremy and I came on our bikes to see the paintings.' (Teresa Harvie, grade 5); 'I thought that (Surrey Art Gallery) was a good place instead of school to learn about Inuits.' (Cindy McLellon, grade 4); 'I like the pictures and paintings. I also enjoyed making the arts that we do.' (Kathleen McLean, grade 5). Other letters went on to ex- 80 plain more about their visit, that first they went on a tour and the guide showed them copper plates that were used to make the prints in the exhibition. Following this, they went to the workshop to learn about Inuit life and how they produced prints. They then made their own prints. These letters indicate that they not only enjoy the visit, but seemed to have grasped the relationship between the workshop and the par- ticular exhibition which they toured. The children seemed to have left the gallery happy with their visit and, in some cases, enthusiastic enough to visit again on their own. The Seeing Ourselves Through Art workshop offers a different ap- proach to studying art than do the other gallery workshops--the media oriented clay workshop, the elements and principles of design focus of the art encounter workshops, and the art of another culture focus of the Inuit Arts and Culture. It has a more traditional art history focus. As such it may be the most difficult of the workshops to promote. Many people, teachers included, have a pre-conceived idea that art history, especially Canadian art history, is a dry, 'academic' subject. This notion is one that is difficult to overcome, so special efforts had to be made to ensure that the workshop acted to dispel this misconception, for both the children and their teachers, by being both fun and informative. By the time the final form of the scripts of the pre-visit package and the workshop had been reached, we were confident that we had achieved that balance. It remained to be seen how the teachers received and eval- uated the materials. Five classes were booked for the evaluation period of mid October to mid December, 1982. All five of the teachers of those classes returned their evaluation questionnaires and offered verbal comments about the 81 workshop. Because I taught a l l of the evaluated s e s s i o n s , I was able to s e t up a rapport with the teachers that encouraged t h e i r comments. Of the c l a s s e s p a r t i c i p a t i n g , three were from grade f i v e and one each from grades four and s i x . Since our intended audience f o r t h i s workshop was grades four to seven, we seemed to have a c c u r a t e l y f o r e c a s t where the i n t e r e s t f o r t h i s t o p i c would be. Most of our bookings were from the middle of the f o r e c a s t e d range. The p r e - v i s i t package was sent to only four of the c l a s s e s , one of which had no time to work through i t before the v i s i t , so there are only three e v a l u a t i o n s of the package (see Appendix 12). The backgrounds of the teachers who p a r t i c i p a t e d i n these workshops are probably t y p i c a l of many elementary school t e a c h e r s . Two admitted to a l i m i t e d background i n a r t or a r t h i s t o r y and the t h i r d has no back- ground i n these areas. A l l o f the teachers agreed t h a t doing a preparatory l e s s o n with t h e i r c l a s s e s before going on a g a l l e r y v i s i t i s important. Only two, however, a c t u a l l y d i d a l e s s o n , before every f i e l d t r i p , and that d e a l t with what an a r t g a l l e r y was r a t h e r than i n f o r m a t i o n about the s u b j e c t they would be e x p l o r i n g at the g a l l e r y . A l l used and enjoyed the package t h a t was sent to them from the Surrey A r t G a l l e r y . Only one of the three attempted the commentary without the tape of the s c r i p t . They a l l found the i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r the use of the m a t e r i a l s c l e a r . In g e n e r a l , the teachers found the s c r i p t the r i g h t l e n g t h , the vocabulary a p p r o p r i a t e and the m a t e r i a l s i n t e r e s t i n g , h e l p f u l and r e l e - vant to the c u r r i c u l u m ( i n these grades, the students are studying n a t i v e people, s e t t l e r s and Canadian h i s t o r y i n s o c i a l s t u d i e s ) . One teacher thought that the information i n the s c r i p t might be too d e t a i l e d ( t h i s 82 was the teacher with no art background and I think he felt both threaten- ed and out of his depth with this new topic). The activity sheets were well received by both teachers and students. Several of the students brought their completed activity sheets to show me at the gallery. The children did not seem to have trouble completing the assignments and said that they thought they were 'fun but not too easy', as one child expres- sed it . Teacher comments indicated that they found the package to be very helpful, and that they appreciated being provided with the materials that were not usually readily available to them. One teacher offered two suggestions for revising the package. She suggested more 'art type' activities, a suggestion that I would be reluc- tant to follow if it meant cutting out some of the present activities. Because one of our purposes is to show the teacher how to approach art through other subject areas and how to use art as a means to reach those areas, i t is important to use a number of activities which are not spe- cifically an 'art' or studio based activity. She also thought that we could use fewer vocabulary activities. This part of the activity sheets could be reduced a bit but the vocabulary introduced through this package is very important preparation for the discussions that will take place at the gallery workshop. That is one of the major purposes in developing the pre-visit packages. Five teachers evaluated the "in-gallery" segment of the workshop (see Appendix 13). After observing their classes in the workshop, all teachers who had done the pre-visit package with their classes felt that the preparation had helped their class to be more receptive to the work- shop than they might have been. All of these teachers felt that because 83 the children had been given information that helped them to answer ques- tions and make observations in the workshop, they felt quite relaxed and confident that they would give right answers when the gallery instructor asked their opinions. The children were eager to be able to use some of the vocabulary introduced in the preparation kit . I was pleased to hear words such as portrait, pose or commission used correctly by the children in our discussion. The teachers indicated that they were words that had not been discussed before the pre-visit kit . This certainly helped the students be receptive to the information in the workshop, which was, for the most part, new to the children. Although the children were not very familiar with the subject of the workshop, most of them were familiar with the studio technique (tissue paper collage). They were not, however, familiar with our approach to making the collage—doing an abstract, self-portrait. The teachers said that this whole idea was helpful to them because i t used a simple tech- nique with materials that are available even in these times of budget cuts. The technique could also be used to explore a number of other ideas. On the whole, the teachers were pleased with the workshops format. To quote one of them, "it is good to have a ' l istening' session and then 'hands-on' to implement the ideas." My only concern with this positive evaluation is that the teacher regarded the slide section as a "listen- ing" session. We were very careful to make these sessions very much a 'looking' and 'evaluating' experience for the children. We tried to lec- ture as l i t t le as possible, encouraging the children to participate in discussion. As in the Inuit workshop, teachers were pleased with the content, 84 language, focus and presentation of the workshop. The major concern was, again, that the slide section was too long, although 'excellent'. The teachers felt that the time devoted to this section took time away from the 'hands-on' portion. In fact, the time allotted for each section is equal (forty-five minutes). I reiterate that the primary concern of the gallery is not the production of art and that part of the purpose of the workshops is to show teachers ways they may try to introduce the non-pro- duction aspects of art education into their classroom program. I discus- sed this problem with some of the teachers and they agreed that it would be very difficult to shorten the presentation and still cover the topic. Their suggestions for a solution ranged from dividing the workshop into two workshops to extending the time spent on the workshops to a full two hours instead of one and a half hours. They felt that everything we covered in the presentation was interesting and important and therefore we should not make large deletions from the material. Once again, the teachers expressed their support for any help that we could offer them. Their strongest request was for gallery staff to visit the schools for workshops and art appreciation. They would also welcome teacher workshops and more kits. What they seemed to learn most from our present workshops was some ideas on how to approach art history and appreciation in their own classes. As the instructor for this workshop, I was pleased with the respon- ses of all the classes taught in this evaluation period. All of the classes were a little different and I found that the presentation I gave to each class also differed. The differences I observed seemed not to be so much the result of the classes being of varying grade levels, but more to do with whether or not the class had done the preparation lesson. The 85 one grade five class that had not had the preparation seemed to be com- posed of students of equal ability to the other two classes, but they were much slower to participate in discussion. Perhaps one of the advantages of being an experienced teacher when one must repeat the same workshop several times, is that experience gives you more confidence to edit and re-arrange the content of the workshop as you go along. Experience teaches the teacher to be able to assess a group quickly and adjust the material and presentation accordingly. The inexperienced teacher may lack the confidence to 'play' with the material she has been given to present. Many docents and gallery instructors also lack this experience. My major concern is the length of the slide section of the workshop. Much of the material cannot be covered in the allotted time and some of the student activities had to be deleted. I think that this is unfortu- nate as those activities might be the most helpful to the teachers and also be valuable aids to the children's understanding of the material. I think the problem stems from our being overly ambitious about how much can be covered in one class session, and that, in future, perhaps the workshop topics will have to be reduced in scope. Alternatively, a large topic could be covered in a series of workshops rather than just one. This could be a way of attracting more school visitors as well as offer- ing the classes an extended art experience. The idea of extending the workshop time to two hours also seems viable as the children were still interested and attentive at the end of an hour and a half, and showed every indication that they could handle another half hour. On occasion I was concerned that the children were not understanding the instructions for their self-portrait assignment. The concept of mak- 86 ing a picture based on feelings and personalities is a difficult one to understand. It is difficult to break the already ingrained idea that a portrait must show a face with all the appropriate features and details. Once into the project, though, most of the children seemed to have no difficulty 'revealing' themselves. Those who had the most difficulty were the older children who were fast approaching the insecurities of pu- berty. It seemed that the greatest lack of understanding of the assign- ment was the teachers, who had much more to 'unlearn', as one of them expressed it . None of the teachers in this group tried their own self- portrait but they all helped their students with their work. Some of the 'advice' they gave the children showed some lack of understanding of the assignment. The work that the children produced (see Appendix 15 for photographs) was exciting and their comments about their work ranged from a shaky rendition (soprano!) of the song 'Am I Blue' to ' . . . it's obvious from Jeff's that he's a mess', to 'I guess if it's about a person its important'. It was odd that in some classes there was a marked differ- ence in the compositions of the boys and the girls. The boys tended to choose 'stronger' colours and more angular shapes. It would be an inter- esting further study to explore the reasons for the differences. Was a different self-concept inherent between the sexes? Was it the results of sex-role stereotyping? Was it the results of our discussions about some abstract portraits in the workshop where we tried to decide what the artist had done to make the paintings about a man or a woman (e.g. Helen by William Ronald, 1972)? On the whole, the children and the teachers were enthusiastic about their portraits—wanting to display them, wanting to try another, wanting to do portraits of others. 87 When the gallery education officer came to observe one of the work- shops, she was pleased with what she saw. Aside from a concern that we had to cut back on the length of the slide section, her comments were mainly about minor changes in wording. One of the requirements set out for these workshops were that they be adaptable for audiences other than school groups from grades four to seven. I had the opportunity to use the workshop with a grade one class, much below the level we were writing for, and as a gallery event for fam- ilies. The grade one class presented the greatest challenge but proved to be an enjoyable group. Not only were they young, but they also were a group with various 'special needs'. The group included children who did not speak English, hyperactive children, a physically handicapped child and several children with emotional problems. A challenge. For that group I used basically the material that I had put together for a follow- up class with two of the older groups (see the next section for details of that study) and cut the workshop time to one hour--thirty minutes with slides and thirty minutes picture making. The class worked well and the children remained attentive and active. The family groups at the gallery event presentation were also a delight. It was obvious that a couple of the children had been 'roped' into attending, as had one of the fathers. But once started, the workshop engaged everyone's attention. Both par- ents and children told me that they had learned from the lecture and it was very satisfying to hear family members discussing the questions I posed and working together on the portraits. The children in the group ranged in age from four to sixteen. The tour of the current exhibition that either follows or precedes the workshops is an important part of the school visits to the gallery. 88 Indeed there would not be much sense in giving the workshop in a gallery setting without them. It is important that the tour guide (docent) use some of the concepts discussed in the workshops in her discussion of the exhibit. Unfortunately, to date none of the docents has either seen the workshops or read the scripts to know how to relate her tour to the work- shop material. Of course, the docents, who are volunteers, already have a heavy time commitment just keeping up with the twice yearly training sessions the gallery gives them and preparing new tours each month for the changing exhibitions. For the gallery to be able to justify their education program format, there is going to have to be provision made for the docents to be well briefed on the workshop text, by either observing a school'group or having the presentation given to them as a group. A Follow-up Study After the workshop and pre-visit material had been taught and evalu- ated, some questions still remained unanswered. These questions concern- ed, among other things, the value of the gallery program as an education- al experience for the children. Was its effect momentary and confined to the visit period? Was there, as gallery staff hoped, a carry-over of their enjoyment and knowledge to future art experiences? In addition, were the children able to apply the ideas presented to them in the work- shop using slides of paintings to a discussion of 'real' paintings? It was decided to conduct a follow-up study with some of the classes who had visited the workshop programs in an attempt to answer these ques- tions. Classes who had participated in the Seeing Ourselves Through Art workshop were chosen as test groups because, having taught those work- shops, the researcher was familiar with the classes and exactly how dis- 89 cussions had gone in the workshop. In addition, the content of that workshop is more strictly art oriented than the social studies based Inuit workshop. Thus it is more relevant to the purpose of the follow-up study. Two classes were selected from the five evaluated in the preceding chapter. The classes were the same grade level, of similar size and from similar neighbourhoods but different schools. The teachers of both of these classes were enthusiastic about providing art experiences for their students although one had considerably more art experience than the other. The teachers also seemed to have different styles in relating to their classes—one was quite energetic and the other more relaxed, but both had good rapport with the students. Classes of similar character were chosen so that we were testing children from similar contexts. Teachers with slightly differing profiles were chosen to ensure that we did not obtain positive results only because the teacher was knowledge- able and energetic. The two teachers were contacted by a letter (see Appendix 16) intro- ducing the project and asking permission to visit their class and use them as test cases. The letter was designed to be informative and com- plimentary in order to encourage the teachers' participation. Both teachers were enthusiastic and telephoned immediately to set up dates for the visit. Dates approximately one month after the class visited the gallery were chosen. The teachers and gallery staff felt that this was a reasonable amount of time for the children to retain information, but long enough after the visit that some of the excitement and short memory retention would have worn off. At the school, the students were lead in a forty-five minute class 90 by the researcher (the specific content of this class follows). Because teachers are the ones who know their class best and could most accurately assess the progress of their students, i t was important to involve them as evaluators of the follow-up. This evaluation was subjective and in- formal, taking place directly after the class in discussion with the re- searcher. In addition to this evaluation, the classes were taped so that the researcher could later review the session. The teachers were asked to assess whether their students seemed to have retained the cr i t ica l / analytic ski l ls introduced to them in the workshop. Teachers were asked to assess whether the children had retained vocabulary learned at the workshop by using i t in the follow-up class. They were asked i f they saw a difference in the type of observations the children made before and after the workshop when confronted with visual images. They also were asked whether their students were able to transfer these ski l ls from dis- cussion of slides of paintings to discussion of real paintings. The outline of the class conducted with the children as a follow-up class to their gallery v is i t for the Seeing Ourselves Through Art work- shop is as follows: The class began with a discussion of why an artist paints a picture, using as examples five slides that the children saw as a part of the workshop (for details of these slides, see the slide l i s t accompanying the workshop script in Appendix 9). The children were asked why the artist may have painted each picture and were given the chance to tell what else they remembered about the paintings. The slides shown were: 1. Votive of the Three Castaways—painted by the artist to tell a story and to express gratitude for the rescue of the castaways. 91 2. Mere Jeanne Francoise—painted to record what a particular person looked l i k e . 3. Fathers of Confederation—to describe an important event. 4. Vera - painted to show how the a r t i s t feels about the sub- ject. 5. Walking Woman—painted so that the a r t i s t could experiment with colour, design, etc. These slides were shown in chronological order, as they were in the work- shop, in order to reinforce the sense of a progession through Canadian art from early settlement to the present. In both the pre-visit k i t , which both classes had worked through prior to their workshop, and in the workshop, attempts were made to ex- pand the children's vocabulary for dealing with art by introducing sever- al new terms. For the follow-up, eleven of these words were, printed on a large card which was placed before the group. The words used were: por- t r a i t , figure painting, composition, monochrome, chiaroscuro, represent, traditional, r e a l i s t i c , preparation, abstract, pose. The nine slides l i s t e d below were shown to the children and they were asked to pick which words from the l i s t applied to each slide, so that eventually they formu- lated definitions for each term and an example for application. Once again the slides are shown in chronology. The slides used were (see slide l i s t in Appendix 9 for details): 1. A Haida Human Face Mask—traditional, represent 2. J o l i Fou Inn—figure painting 3. France Bringing the Faith—represent, r e a l i s t i c 4. Paul Kane sketches—preparation 5. Meeting of the School Trustees—chiaroscuro 92 6. Vincent Massey—pose, r e a l i s t i c 7. Carl Schaefer—monochrome, composition 8. Millar Brittain-Rummage Sale—composition 9. Katherine—abstract, composition (this section of the workshop, as well as the others, took the form of an open discussion). For the last part of the class, the children were shown two 'real portraits'. The f i r s t was an oil on canvas by an Ontario a r t i s t , Char- lene Tatham, of the researcher, and a mixed media (on paper), double portrait by a young British Columbian a r t i s t , Catherine McEwen. The children were given the opportunity to touch and examine the pieces while we discussed technical terms about the media—canvas, oil paint, support, frame, ink, pencils. The children were also shown p r e l i - minary drawings, photographs and mockups used by the artists to plan the portraits. Following this we discussed the portraits with some of the following questions: Who is the subject? Did the a r t i s t know the sub- ject well? What colours has the a r t i s t used? Why? What mood is shown by the painting? Is the composition effective? Which is more realis- tic? Evaluation of the response of the two classes, to the follow-up class reveals that the children's responses exceeded the expectations of both the teachers and the researcher. From the tapes of the class, the evalu- ator noticed that the class of the teacher with more art background and a more energetic teaching style responded a l i t t l e more readily and confi- dently than did the other class. This was possibly because they are more accustomed to this sort of discussion of art. However, neither class had d i f f i c u l t y relating their knowledge gained through discussion of slides 93 of paintings at the workshop to the paintings shown to them, and both classes were able to apply the vocabulary they had learned at the work- shop both to the slides and the paintings used in the follow-up study. Both teachers indicated that the vocabulary the students were using in the discussions in the follow-up sessions was a marked improvement over that used by the children before the workshop pre-visit kit or the work- shop. When asked what comment he would make about the double portrait, one boy replied 'It looks kind of scary and stands out 'cause of . . . you know that 'chairy' word that means real light and real dark!' Chiaro- scuro was the word he searched for. He made a valiant effort to pro- nounce it , but definitely knew what it means and was quite correct. When commenting on the colours of the portrait of me one girl said 'I think the artist likes you because she used lots of warm, bright colours. Green isn't supposed to be warm but it looks warm there. Is the artist your friend?' The artist is in fact a very good friend and the yellow/ green is quite a warm green. The teacher said that the class had not discussed the warm/cool colour concept before the workshop. She was very pleased with the way her students had grasped the idea. It must be taken into account that the children's enthusiastic re- sponse in the follow-up study might be due in part to the extra effort on their part to impress the researcher or because of the excitement of a break in their everyday routine. Despite this, this rather informal study indicates that children do derive new knowledge from the workshop format sessions at the Surrey Art Gallery and that this knowledge is re- tained for use in later art experiences. This result might suggest that the gallery consider incorporating follow-up classes as well as the pre- visit sessions as an integral part of the workshop program. This would provide an opportunity to continue their art experience and to reinforce the concepts explored in the gallery workshop. 95 CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS We have seen that there is a problem of reaching users, or potential users, of gallery programs in order to inform them of what is being of- fered. It is general practice to send publicity posters and press re- leases to the principals of schools and those supervisors and helping teachers or coordinators who work with curriculum and make recommenda- tions to teachers. This study indicates that information often does not reach the teacher, who is the person who arranges the trips. Galleries should find a way of reaching these teachers more directly. This would require more time of course, but much of the work could be done by docents and volunteers. These people could compose l ists of interested contact people by phoning schools and meeting with supervisors. They could deliver information to the schools in person at lunch hours or attend staff meetings so that a personal contact is made with the teach- ers. While these efforts would be a great deal of work the f i rst year, the amount of work would be decreased yearly, as the schools become aware of gallery programs. As the present workshop package format is well received by both teachers and students, and offers learning experiences for both, that format should be maintained by the Surrey Art Gallery. It would also be a useful format for other galleries to adopt. For future workshops, teachers should be consulted about the topics they would like to see of- fered. These topics should, however, be of a narrower scope than the Seeing Ourselves Through Art or even the Inuit Arts and Culture. Neither topic can be adequately covered in the time allotted. They could be nar- rowed to, perhaps, Seeing Ourselves Through Canadian Portraits, or The 96 Inuit Printmaker. Topics could be divided into a series of workshops. Especially well received, useful, and pedagogically sound, are the pre- v is i t preparatory packages, and they should be maintained as a necessary part of the gallery package. In addition, more follow-up should be of- fered either in the form of a post-visit package or of a personal follow- up in the classroom by gallery staff or docents. Teachers indicate a need for this information. It would also help for gallery staff and docents whose understanding of the school would be increased through this direct contact with the school classroom situation. For the children, follow-up classes would ensure that their gallery experience 'lived fruitful ly and creatively in subsequent experiences' (Dewey in Silver, 1978,p.27). In addition to the workshops, which are designed to be of use to both students and teachers, the galleries should make every at- tempt to design programs on gallery use specifically for teachers. While this may seem to be a job of the school board and teacher training inst i - tutions, i t is a role that should be supplemented by experts in the gal- lery. If gallery staff offer programs for schools and wish their efforts to be rewarded with both full bookings and cognitive and affective gains for the children, they are going to have to help with teacher education. Such contact with teachers may not only help the teacher but may also attract gallery users and open avenues for gallery staff to learn from teachers. Once again the demands that this sort of program would place on gallery staff time and funds are great, but could be lessened with creative planning. Local school districts could be helpful in providing space, publicity and teacher time for workshops to be offered as part of Professional Development days ( if they are provided), in the evenings-or as summer4 institute courses. Development of these programs could be the 97 combined effort of school board staff and gallery staff or could be pro- jects for graduate students in education or summer grant students. These programs would be offered to teachers as fellow educators. Whoever de- signs the programs should therefore have a good knowledge of teaching and of the schools. This familiarity with schools and teaching is also an important qualification for anyone writing and planning future workshops for the gallery education program. Not only should the workshops provide sound information in art history and aesthetics, but its presentation should be appropriate to the age group it is designed for, and in keeping with up- to-date education theories and trends. People with the necessary exper- ience to write such material could be found among graduate students in art education, unemployed teachers, or teachers who have retired who might welcome such a project, especially if some of the work could be done at home. Working teachers could also participate in summer writing projects. Funding could come from gallery sources, government employment grants or through arrangement with the school district. If galleries could interest education students in developing materials for the educa- tional program for assignments or thesis work, they would be offering students valuable practical experience. The gallery would thus have materials costing little more than production costs and time for consult- ation with the students. If a gallery deems it worthwhile to go through all the efforts necessary to put together good program materials, they must also make the commitment to ensure that the presentation of that material is up to the same standard. Because often the programs are presented by instructors or docents who were not involved in their development and probably have 98 l i t t l e or no formal teaching experience, the time must be taken to thor- oughly train these people. Gallery staff should know that the material they have approved is appropriately presented. Before the instructor faces a class, she should be thoroughly briefed in both the contents of the workshop and styles of presentation and have had the opportunity for a ' tr ial-run' presentation with gallery staff. By offering a package'that includes pre-visit activit ies, in-gallery workshop and tour activit ies, and follow-up activities or suggestions, a certain pedagogical flow is implied. Each of these activities will build upon the previous ones to provide a total and lasting experience for the children. It must be guaranteed that this flow is not interrupted in practice. If i t i s , the program format loses much of its justif ication. To make sure the flow does occur smoothly, activities must occur in appropriate order and the links between the activities must be apparent. If, as in many programs, segments are conducted by different personnel, al l involved must be thoroughly aware of the material covered in the other segments. In the case of the Surrey Art Gallery, docents should either attend a workshop as an observer or, as a group, be given a work- shop presentation by the instructors. Students and teachers should be able to see the relationships and use what they have learned in one ses- sion to deal with the following segment. This is particularly a problem when the tour portion of a package comes between the preparation mater- ials and the segment for which they prepare the children. It is impor- tant that the exhibition that is viewed and the way the guide handles i t offer a link between the preparation and the workshop, otherwise the ex- perience would be confusing to the students. If the tour is not handled in such a way as to incorporate the workshop activit ies, is there a jus- 99 tification for offering the package, or doing the workshops in a gallery? The main purpose of a gallery program is to help children relate to art. They must have the opportunity to demonstrate their ability to communi- cate with the art in the gallery as a result of what they learn in a workshop. The final recommendation is that the gallery staff attempts to work with teachers to help them solve some of the problems that prevent their classes from visiting the gallery or using its services. Difficulty finding transportation to the gallery is a major deterent to gallery visits. Often the teacher is totally defeated by lack of budget, school policy against the use of private transportation for insurance reasons, and the lack of parent participation in car pooling. The gallery could offer help from two directions—taking the workshop to the school, or helping to provide transportation, as does the Heritage Village Museum in Burnaby, offering suggestions that the teacher may not have thought of or using funding sources such as the Manpower and Immigration Community Recovery Program or private or business donations that might be available to the gallery. This latter suggestion is somewhat idealistic but may be a possibility. Gallery staff I spoke to thought that these sorts of efforts are beyond their commitment, and may be akin to 'nurse-maiding' the teachers causing them to expect these services even if they do have means of getting to the gallery. However, the contact with teachers that these services could bring would be an investment that proves worthwhile use. Not only may they attract more users to the programs, but gallery instructors who took workshops for presentation at schools could learn much about school life. The gallery would have to make clear to the schools, however, that these are emergency services and will not be 100 available when school funding is sufficient to provide students with transportation to the gallery. The galleries' most valuable resources are its collection and exhibitions and the primary function of a gallery educational program is to bring the children into contact with that body of work in the gallery. In assessing of the evaluations of the workshops prepared for this study, I have concluded that these workshops provide a welcome and needed service. The preparation package portion provided teachers with both a specific preparation lesson for the workshop their class will be attend- ing and ideas about how to prepare their class for other gallery trips. In addition, the preparation kits provide background information that is necessary to gain full benefit from the workshop. Having thus presented that information, gallery staff has to spend less of the valuable in- gallery time with background and can delve into the primary concern of the workshop. The entire workshop package provides teachers with some ideas on how to introduce art topics into their curriculum and gives them some specific information on the topics covered without using equipment and supplies which are beyond their reach if they were to try similar lessons on their own. It provides the children access to facets of art which are not usually being introduced to them in the schools through a series of events, each building upon and reinforcing the others. Providing the workshops with a title and focus that obviously re- lates art to another curriculum area encourages participation of element- ary teachers. These are teachers who have limited background in art so they may avoid workshop titles that concern topics which are not familiar to them. Most of those who chose the Inuit workshop did so because the class was studying the Inuit culture. 101 The teachers who participated in evaluation supported our programs as a form of teacher education. The concern that arises, however, is whether they learned what we had hoped they would learn from the work- shop. One of the major intentions of the workshop was to help teachers with the 'non-production' aspects of art education. They all made things with their students in class. What we wanted to illustrate was how to 'talk' about art and how to link the 'talking' and the 'doing' to provide a fuller learning experience for the children. Our role as a gallery is to be primarily concerned with the 'seeing and talking about' and indi- cate how this can carry over to the doing. The teachers' repeated crit i - cism that the first portion of the in-gallery workshop was too long leav- ing not enough time for the project (in fact, there was equal time for each part), indicates that they were firmly rooted in their preconception that art is "making things". Perhaps what is needed is to have sessions for teachers designed to clearly spell out what we hoped to illustrate and then given them examples. They must learn that the end of the work- shop is not the end of the experience, that we are providing them with something they can build upon in their classrooms. Further proof of the teachers' focus on studio aspects of art education is that of the four workshops offered by the Surrey Art Gallery, the clay workshop is the most heavily booked. From our contact with teachers it seems that communication with schools is difficult but not because of their lack of interest. It is more because of the already high demands on teachers' time. These teach- ers teach all of the subjects in their curriculum to their class and find themselves dealing with more responsibilities in less time as a result of declining enrollments and budgetary restrictions. If there is money 102 available for field trips, i t is more likely to be issued for trips re- lated to subjects considered to be more important than art. If the com- munication gap between galleries and teachers is to bridge, the in i t ia- tive is going to have to come from the galleries. Without the strength- ening of communications between galleries and schools, the partnership of the two institutions in the art education of children envisioned by Dr. Robert Ott is but a vision. Any program that a gallery provides to help teachers should 'give teachers exposure and practice that will make them confident and comfortable not only in the museum (gallery) but with art i tse l f , and to try through teachers to integrate works of art into the education of the young' (Silver,!978,p.463). If this prescription for teacher education by galleries were followed, the gap in communication between galleries and schools would be closed. 103 REFERENCE NOTES Aesthetic education, according to Vincent Lanier (Lanier,1980,p.l9), should be a primary focus of art education. 'Aesthetically l i ter- ate' is the term he would use to describe the student who has learn- ed through art education to be 'affectionately knowledgeable about al l the visual arts of past and present and of other cultures and our own and how these arts can be dealt with'. Edmund Feldman uses the term 'visual literacy' to describe what he thinks should be the focus of art education. All visual images are a language which we must all be able to read in order to cope with our culture which is 'increasingly represented and perceived in visual terms' (Feldman, 1976,p.200). We learn to 'read' this visual language through devel- opment of crit ical ski l ls and examining and assessing images of the past. In this study, the terms museum and art gallery are used frequently. Both of these terms refer to institutions exhibiting art. In the United States, and thus in much of the literature available, 'art museum' is used to refer to an institution with a permanent collec- tion representing the art of past ages and past cultures as well as contemporary work. These institutions also collect and exhibit artifacts. 'Art gallery' is used by other institutions which do not collect artifacts, only art work. In Canada, the term 'art gallery' is used most frequently, perhaps because our institutions tend to not combine art and artifacts in their collections. For the pur- poses of this study, the terms are interchangeable (from discussion with Anne Morrison, Vancouver Art Gallery, March, 1980). This information comes from a conversation with Kit Grauer of the 104 Richmond School District, March, 1983. 4. Mary Erikson discussed these games at her address to the Curriculum Implementation Institute at the University of British Columbia, July, 1982. 105 REFERENCES Adam, T. R. The museum and popular culture. N.Y.: A.M.A. Association for Adult Education, 1937, 9. Adams, W. H. The national gallery's role in art education. Art Education, Dec. 1971, 24:9, 14-17 Axson, S. , Cox, K. & Hall, G. Art museums and schools. N.Y.: Schribners, 1913. Bassing, A. Educational programs for the museums of art & anthropology - an international overview in Presentations on Art Education Research Orientation: Art, Culture and the Museum, 1981, 6_, Montreal, 81-84. Bleike, C. The volunteer in art education. Art Education, Jan. 1980, 33:1 , 19-20. Bloom, Kathryn. Arts organizations & their services to schools: Patrons or partners? An emerging pattern for educational change - The arts in education. Prepared by the staff of the Arts in education program of the J.D.R. Fund, Jan. 1974. Borcoman, J . W. Public education in the visual arts, Curator, Vol. XII:1, 1969. Cameron, Duncan. A view point; the museum as a communication system and implications for museum education; Curator, Vol. 10:11 , 1968. Caston, E. The object of my affections; commentary on museums, Art Educa- t ion, Jan. 1980, 33:1 Cauman, Samuel. The living museum. N.Y.: N.Y.U. Press, 1952. Chalmers, F.G. The art museum & art education. Instructional Psychology, Vol. 1:1 , 40-44. Chambers, K. Field work in relation to museum classroom teaching. Cura- tor, Vol. 3, 1958, 8-11. 106 Clay, George. Do museums educate? Museum News, Vol. 30/2, Oct. 1960, 36-40. Cox, K. Museums of art and teachers, Art museums & schools; Saxon ed., N.Y. Schribners, 1913. Cuthbertson, Shirley. No experience needed. B.C.A.T.A. Journal, Apri l , 1969. Davis, S. The art museum, games & strategies for children, for art in museums, unpublished paper, 1980. Dewey, J . Experience and education. New York: Coll ier, 1963, 25-29. Erikson, Mary. Uses of history in art education. Studies in Art Educa- ti on, 18/3. Fansler, Roberta. Art and adolescence, Art Museum Bulletin, 1932, 23:2, 58. Feldmon, Edmund B. Visual literacy, Journal of Aesthetic Education, Vol. 10, July, 1976, 195-200. Feldmon, Edmund B. Catalyst - The arts; Art Education, 31:10, Nov. 1978, 7-12. Foster, M. S. Game catalogue: Educational approach to exhibition viewing; Art Education, 27:7, Oct. '74. Gatch, H. A comparison of learning in a museum with learning in school, unpublished thesis, University of Toronto, 1947-48. Grana, C. The private lives of public museums; Trans-action, 1974, 20-25. Hofman, H. Translating inert to living knowledge. Curator, Vol 5:2, 1962. Housen, A. What is beyond or before the lecture tour? A study of aesthet- ic modes of understanding. Art Education, 33:1, 1980, 17-18. Jones, Lois. Volunteer guides & classroom teachers in school visitation programs in European & N.A. art museums. Studies in Art Education, 1978. •107 Lacey, T. & Agar, J . I know its there but how do I use it . Art Education, 33:1 , Jan. 1980, 10-12. Lanier, Vincent. Six terms on the agenda for the eighties. Art Education, 33:8, September, 1980, 16-23. Lanier, V. Popularization without misrepresenation, curriculum content for aesthetic literacy. Art Education, 33:6, Nov. 1980. Larrabbee, Eric, ed: Museums & education, Washington, D .C: Smithsonian Press, 1968. Low, T. The museum as a social instrument. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art, 1942. Lowenfeld, Viktor & Brittain, W. L. Creative and mental growth (5th edi- tion). New York: MacMillan, 1970. MacGregor, Ronald. Art plus. Toronto: McGraw-Hill, 1977, 7. McLanthan, Richard. Art & man: extending museum resources. Museum News, Vol. 49/2, Oct. 1971 , 18-20. Marcouse, Renee. The listening eye, teaching in an art museum. London: Her Majesty's stationary office, 1961. Martin, E. Why museum education in today's world. Museum News, Vol. 46(2), 1967, 31-2. Mayer, Susan. Museum education: beyond the tour. Art Education, 33:1, January, 1980. Mayer, S. What about museums. Art Education, 24:4 & 5, May, 1974. Merrill, G. New dimensions in museum teaching. Museum News, Oct. 1967, 35-37. Mims, Sandra. Museum tripping. Art Education, 35:1, Jan. 1982. 1 0 8 Morris, J . & Stuckhardt, M. Oaea Journal, Vol. 19:1, Ohio Art Education Assocation. Including: (1) Defurio, A. Burn the museums. Some diverse thoughts in museums and museum education. (2) Herr, M. Education Programs at Allen Art Institute. (3) Zakon, R. Directions & education. Murphy, John T. What you can do with your education department. Museum News, Vol 49/2, Oct. 1970, 4-17. Newson, B. On understanding art museums. Studies in Art Education, 16:2, 46-53. Newson, B. & Silver, A. The art museum as educator. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978. Ott, Robert. Museum education and society: relevance today, art, culture and the museum, Presentations on Art Education Research Orientations, Concordia University, 6, 1981. Ott, Robert. Teaching art awareness in museums. Art Teacher, National Art Education Association, 24:1 , 1977, 18-19. Ott, Robert. Museums & schools. Universal partners in education. Art Education, 1980, 33:1 , 7-9. Press, N. Inside art: a program of participation. Art Education, 33:1, Jan. 1980. Rawlins, Ki p i . Educational metamorphasis of the american museum. Studies in Art Education, 20:1 , 1978. Read, Herbert. Education through art. London: Faber & Faber, 1967. Rice, Megan. Looking & seeing. Windsor: Art Gallery of Windsor, 1980. Ripley, S. Museums & education. Curator, XI/3, 1968, 183-88. 109 Rouse, Mary. What research tells us about sequences & structuring in art in art instructions. Art Education, 24:5, May, 1971, 18-26. Sewall, G. Museums as schools. Newsweek, October 15, 1 979. Sewell, Daniel. 'What you see is what you get: An approach to the use of museums for education', Art Education, 24:9, Dec. 1971, 22-25. Smith, C. M. 'Style and education' in aesthetic concepts & education (ed. Ralph A. Smith) Urbana: University of I l l inois Press, 1970, 421-22. Soli ins, S. Games children play in museums. Art Journal, 31:3 (Spring, 1972), 271-5. Stake, R. To evaluate an arts program. Journal of Aesthetic Education, 10:3, (1976), 25. Staley, R. Presentations on art education research orientations; Art, culture & the museum, #6, 1981, Concordia University. Articles: R. Ott. Museum education & society: Relevance today. Korsenik, Diane. Listening to children think about art. Bassing, A. Educational programs for the museums of art and anthropology. Treit, Kit . Museum & art gallery games. B.C.A.T.A. Journal, 19:1, Oct. 1978, 4-6. Whittman, Otto. The museum and its role in art education. Art Education, 19:2, (Feb. 1966), 3-6. Wood, M. A museums contribution to curriculum. Museum News, 4:5, Feb. 1967, 36-38. Wood, M. The museums's contribution to curriculum. Museum News, Feb. 1967, 36-37. Zeller, T. Let's teach art with originals. Art Education, 36:1, Jan. 1983, 43-46. 110 APPENDIX 1 I l l DATE OF INTERVIEW: ! i MUSEUM NAME: • j ADDRESS:^ : PHONE: ̂  j CONTACTj POSITION; , : 1) IS THERE A SPECIFIC EDUCATION DEPARTMENT IN THE MUSEUM? IF NO, WHO FULFILS THAT FUNCTION? 2) STAFF: NUMBER IN DEPARTMENT POSITION NAMES WHAT BACKGROUND AND QUALIFICATIONS DO THE STAFF HAVE? WHY WERE PEOPLE WITH THOSE QUALIFICATIONS CHOSEN? WHAT IS THE RATE OF STAFF TURNOVER IN THE DEPARTMENT? 3)HISTORY: HOW LONG HAS THE MUSUEM HAD AN EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM? WAS IT A PART OF THE ORIGINAL PLANS FOR THE MUSEUM? I i HOW HAS THE DEPARTMENT CHANGED? STAFF SIZE PROGRAM] | i i i I I FACILITIES j • 1 •fy) FACILITIES: ARE THERE SEPARATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT FACILITIES ? OFFICES STUDIOS A.V. EQUIPMENT 5) WHAT IS THE PRIMARY SOURCE OF FUNDING FOR THE MUSEUM? 6) WHAT PROGRAMS ARE OFFERED? ADULTS: HIGH SCHOOLS: ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS: 7) DO YOU FIND THAT THE MAJORITY OF YOUR EFFORTS GO TO A PARTICULAR GROUP? WHO? WHY? 8) DO TOURS SEEM TO BE A MAJOR PART OF YOUR SCHOOL PROGRAM I i WHO LEADS TOURS? j DO TOURS FOLLOW A SET PATTERN OR ARE THEY FLEXIBLE? 9) HOW DO SCHOOLS FIND OUT ABOUT YOUR PROGRAMS?' 10) ARE STUDENTS GENERALLY PREPARED FOR THEIR VISIT? j i i ARE TEACHERS? 1 i 1 1 ) APPROXIMATELY HOW MANY STUDENTS USE THE PROGRAMS EACH YEAR? i i . i • i EACH WEEK? IS THERE A PREDOMINATE AGE/GRADE LEVEL? WHICH? !. l j WHAT SUBJECT AREA ARE MOST CLASSES FROM? I ARE THERE MANY REPEAT VISITS? DO SOME SCHOOLS USE THE MUSEUM MORE THAN OTHERS? WHY? ARE CHILDREN WELCOME TO VISIT THE MUSEUM ON THEIR OWN? - ARE .THERE PEOPLE THERE TO HELP THEM OR ANSWER QUESTIONS IF THEY DO VISIT WITHOUT AN ADULT? 1 2 ) DOES THE MUSEUM OFFER SERVICES SPECIFICALLY FOR TEACHERS? • ARE THERE PLANS FOR SUCH SERVICES i e ) l e c t u r e s e r i e s , a r t h i s t o r y courses, t o u r s , l e s s o n a i d s , i n s e r v i c e t r a i n i n g , v i s i t s to s c h o o l s . . . ; ii4 IS YOUR STAFF INVOLVED WITH ANY TEACHER GROUPS' ie." BCATA? DOES YOUR STAFF FAMILIARIZE ITSELF WITH CURRICULUM IN THE AREA IT SERVES? j DOES YOUR STAFF KEEP UP WITH CURRENT TRENDS IN EDUCATION, SPECIFICALLY ART EDUCATION INTERESTS IN SUCH FOCII AS ETHNOGRAPHIC, ENVIRONMENTAL, CULTURAL, SOCIAL, ;VISUAL/ AESTHETIC LITERACY BASIS FOR ART PROGRAMS? HOW DO YOU SEE YOUR ROLE IN RELATION TO THE SCHOOLS? i 1 3 ) DOES YOUR DEPARTMENT HAVE A STATED PHILOSOPHY ABOUT MUSEUM EDUCATION? WHAT? 14) WHAT ARE THE BASIC PROBLEMS YOU FACE WITH YOUR PRESENT MODE OF OPERATION? i e . r e . t e a c h e r s , s t u d e n t s , s t a f f , time, space.... 1 5 ) HOW DO YOU FORESEE THE FUTURE OF EDUCATION IN THIS MUSEUM? 1 « 1 1 5 APPENDIX 2 Education Services are open to youth and adult community groups in Surrey and the Lower Mainland. We Invite teachers, group leaders and parents to join in along with their attending groups. Programs will run from October 12,1982 to May 31,1983. Booking Book ings for all services must be made in advance by phoning 596-7461. Book early to avoid disappointment! Cost Surrey Art Gal lery Educat ion Services are free of charge. Gallery Hours Weekdays: 9 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Evenings: Tues. and Thurs. 7 - 9:30 p.m. Weekends: Sat. and Sun. 1 - 5:00 p.m. C losed : Statutory Hol idays Guided tours o l cuirent gallery tJAhiuiiiuns are avail- able to groups of 10 - 30 people by booking in advance. Tour length averages one hour. Exhibit ion related films and demonstrations will be offered when available. Tours are led by trained volunteer docents (tour guides). For information o n becoming a volunteer docent, phone 596-7461. b u r andi Workshops are Back!: The Gal lery is pleased to announce the return of this popular program. We can now accommodate 2c lasses simultaneously on program days as a result of extensive classroom renovations. Class A and Class B will participate in different workshops concurrently. Each class will also receive a guided tour of thecurrent exhibition. Preparation and fol low-up materials will be provided. Tour and Workshop Packages can be tailored to suit various age levels. Each session is limited to a maximum of 30 participants and runs from 9:45 a.m. - Noon. Advance booking is required. TUESDAY MORNINGS • Inuit Arts and Culture — an invaluable opportunity to learn about the changing arts and culture of the Inuit. Activities include printmaking, slides, games and "hands-on" exhibits of Inuit tools and clothing on loan from the Government of the Northwest Territories. Suitable for grade 3 through adult. • Seeing Ourselves through Art — take a journey through history to view the people of Canada through the eyes of our artists, past and present. Slides, d iscus- sion, visual arts activities and an art project designed to encourage self-expression are included. Suitable for grade 4 through adult. FRIDAY MORNINGS • The World of Clay — explore the world history of man's manipulation of clay by seeing demonstrations and examples, and work ing with clay and various clay tools. Suitable for grade K through adult. Extensive self-guided follow-up materials are available on loan to participants. Groups wishing to use these materials at the Gallery may do so by booking the c lass- room in advance for use after their workshop. • Art Encounter — learn about works o n exhibit by seeing, discussing and doing, under the guidance of a trained volunteer docent. Art Encounter involves par- ticipants in a variety of perceptual, movement and visual arts activities specif ically designed for each new exhibition. Suitable for grade K through adult. Location: The Surrey Art Gal lery is located in the Surrey Arts Centre complex, 13750 88th Avenue, Surrey, B .C. V3W3L1 . i I i Guildford Town Centra Whalley Town Centre 88 [h Ave • iurrry Aft G*lery 1 1750-9fltn Avt Q N E T S The Gallery's Extension Program offers a range of self- guided Workshops, Poster and Sl ide-Sound Kits for use in your c lassroom or facility on a library loan basis. Most kits may be adapted for use with any age group. Kits include West Coast Native Peoples. Pioneer Arts, The Treasures of Tutankhamun and the Language of Co lour (also excellent for intermediate sc ience classes). Advance booking is required. Surrey Art Gal lery Educat ion Services is financially assisted by the Cultural Services Division of the Surrey Parks and Recreation Commiss ion and the Govern- ment of Brit ish Co lumbia through the Brit ish Columbia Cultural Fund and the British Co lumb ia Lottery Fund. 117 APPENDIX 3 118 A SURVEY FOR TEACHERS TEACHER SCHOOL GRADE TEACHER'S BACKGROUND SUBJECT AREA TAUGHT 1) How o f t e n do you use museums o r a r t g a l l e r i e s w i t h y o u r c l a s s ? A p p r o x i m a t e l y how many t i m e s a n n u a l l y ? 2 ) Do you use t h e museum o r g a l l e r y f o r i t s r e g u l a r c o l l e c t i o n o r o n l y f o r s p e c i a l shows? 3) What s i z e group do you t a k e ? How many a d u l t s p e r c h i l d ? k) What grade l e v e l do you u s u a l l y t a k e ? Why? 5 ) How do you g e t t o t h e museum o r g a l l e r y ? 6) Which museums o r g a l l e r i e s do you use? Why? 7) Have you met t h e e d u c a t i o n o f f i c e r i n t h e museums you use? Who I n i t i a t e d t h a t c o n t a c t ? Why? 8) Do you f i n d t h e museum/gallery s t a f f t o be a c c e s s i b l e ? 9) Do you d i s c u s s y o u r museum v i s i t w i t h the e d u c a t i o n o f f i c e r o r gu i d e p r i o r t o y o u r c l a s s v i s i t ? 10) How does the museum/gallery t r i p f i r i n t o y o u r c l a s s r o o m 1 1 9 program' 1 1 ) Do you p l a n s p e c i f i c t a s k s f o r your s t i d e n t s to do i n con- j u n c t i o n w i t h the v i s i t , i e . q u e s t i o n s to be answered, t r e s u r e hunts, drawings,...? 1 2 ) Do you f i n d that the programs offered at the museum/gallery meets your needs and expectations? 1 3 ) Are the museum/gallery s t a f f f l e x i b l e to accomodate your s p e c i f i c needs? 14) What would make you use the museums or g a l l e r i e s more? 1 5 ) What programs would you l i k e to see offered by the musem/ gall e r y , i e . tours, curriculum related tours, workshops... 1 6 ) Would you use a program whereby museum/gallery s t a f f came to your school? ""hat format, material would you l i k e to see fo r such a program? 1 7 ) What could the museum/gallery do f o r you as a teacher? 18) How do you see the museum/gallery and the school i n r e l a t i o n to each other, i e . museum as enrichment, museum as curriculum aid, museum and school as partners,....? 1 9 ) Do you f e e l comfortable at a museum/gallery? Why? 120 20) What do you f e e l i s the major problem preventing teachers from using museums/galleries to t h e i r greatest potential? 21) Are you aware of the programs offered by the museums/ g a l l e r i e s i n your area? 121 APPENDIX 4 TEACHER SURVEY 1. WHERE DO YOU LIVE? SURREY DISTRICT • OTHER . . 2. WHERE DO YOU TAKE YOUR CLASS FOR FIELD TRIPS (OR, WHERE HAVE YOU TAKEN THEM IN THE PAST)? (This i s f a n t a s i z i n g that there i s budget money f o r f i e l d t r i p s ! ). 3. HOW OFTEN DO YOU SCHEDULE FIELD TRIPS? ONCE A YEAR O TWICE A YEAR • THREE TIMES A YEAR Q FOUR OR MORE TIMES A YEAR O 4. WHY DO YOU CHOOSE THESE PLACES TO VISIT? 5 . DO YOU.FEEL THAT THESE PLACES OFFER SOMETHING DIRECTLY OR EASILY CONNECTED WITH CURRICULUM? WHICH SUBJECT AREAS? 6. DO YOU FEEL THAT THERE IS A CLEAR CUT CONNECTION BETWEEN CURRICULUM AND A VISIT TO AN ART GALLERY? HOW? 7. WHAT I S Y O U R A R T B A C K G R O U N D ? A R T C O U R S E S A T U N I V E R S I T Y O A R T E D U C A T I O N I N T E A C H E R T R A I N I N G O E X T R A C U R R I C U L A R C O U R S E S ON Y O U R OWN I N I T I A T I V E D 8. DO Y O U T H I N K Y O U S H O U L D H A V E M O R E T R A I N I N G A N D / O R H E L P F O R T E A C H I N G A R T I N Y O U R C L A S S R O O M ? 9. DO Y O U L I K E T E A C H I N G A R T ? W H Y ? WHY N O T ? 10. WHAT F O R M DO A R T C L A S S E S I N Y O U R C L A S S R O O M T A K E ? 1. 11. H A V E Y O U E V E R B E E N TO T H E S U R R E Y A R T G A L L E R Y ? WHAT O C C A S I O N E D Y O U R V I S I T T H E R E ? 12. H A V E Y O U E V E R T A K E N Y O U R C L A S S TO T H E S U R R E Y A R T G A L L E R Y ? 13. A R E Y O U A W A R E O F T H E P R O G R A M S O F F E R E D TO S C H O O L S B Y T H E S U R R E Y A R T G A L L E R Y ? 14. WHAT I S Y O U R G E N E R A L V I E W O F T H E S U R R E Y A R T G A L L E R Y ? i e ) t y p e s o f e x h i b i t i o n s , e v e n t s , s t a f f , e t c , WHAT K I N D O F E X H I B I T I O N S W O U L D Y O U L I K E TO S E E T H E R E ? 12k 1 5 . WHERE WOULD YOU GO TO SEE GOOD ART? 1 6 . " I WOULD TAKE MY CLASS TO THE SURREY ART GALLERY I F . . . 11 17.WHAT COULD THE SURREY ART GALLERY DO!.-TO ATTRACT YOUR USE OF THE GALLERY AS A TEACHER? i e . t e a c h e r workshops on g a l l e r y use a r t a p p r e c i a t i o n ; '• a r t h i s t o r y ; ^ u s i n g a r t i n o t h e r c u r r i c u l u m a r e a s programs f o r s t u d e n t s 1 }•.in the form o f . . . . 2) on the f o l l o w i n g t o p i c 18.WHAT DO YOU THINK IS THE ROLE OF ART IN THE COMMUNITY ; • 1 AND AS A PART OF OUR CULTURE? ! 1 9 .ANY COMMENTS? 1 2 5 APPENDIX 5 m*r„£K S U R R E Y A R T G A L L E R Y 599-7461 SURREY ART GALLERY INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT SURREY ART GALLERY 13750 - 88th Avenue Surrey, B.C. V3W 3L1 ( 604) 596-7461 128 INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP PREPARATORY KIT CONTENTS 1. Teacher I n t r o d u c t i o n Sheet 2. 1 S l e e v e of S l i d e s 3. 1 C a s s e t t e Tape of S l i d e Commentary 4. S c r i p t f o r S l i d e Commentary 5. L i s t of S l i d e s i n c l u d e d i n K i t 6. S t u d e n t A c t i v i t y Sheet 7. Teacher Copy o f A c t i v i t y Sheet ( w i t h answers) 8. F o l l o w - u p Ideas 9. Mask Making Techniques 10. D e s c r i p t i o n o f Games and Toys 129 SURREY ART GALLERY; INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP Teacher I n t r o d u c t i o n : We are l o o k i n g f o r w a r d t o your c l a s s ' s v i s i t t o the S u r r e y A r t G a l l e r y f o r the Tour and Workshop Package f e a t u r i n g the I n u i t A r t s and C u l t u r e Workshop on ^ _ from 9:45 a.m. to 1 2 : 0 0 Noon. The package a l s o f e a t u r e s a guided t o u r o f the c u r r e n t G a l l e r y e x h i b i t i o n . We have d e s i g n e d t h i s package of m a t e r i a l as an a i d i n p r e p a r i n g your c l a s s f o r the workshop. I t i n c l u d e s : 1. A s l e e v e of 20 s l i d e s . 2. A c a s s e t t e tape o f . t h e commentary f o r the s l i d e s . 3. A s c r i p t of the commentary. 4. A worksheet f o r s t u d e n t s . 5. An answer sheet f o r you. You w i l l need t o round up: 1. A s l i d e p r o j e c t o r and s c r e e n . 2. A c a s s e t t e tape r e c o r d e r . A p p r o x i m a t e l y 45 minutes of c l a s s t i m e s h o u l d be s e t a s i d e f o r the p r e s e n t a t i o n . The m a t e r i a l covered i n t h i s k i t i s meant t o p r o v i d e some background i n f o r m a t i o n about the t r a d i t i o n a l I n u i t way of l i f e . When you v i s i t the G a l l e r y we w i l l i m p ortance of a r t i n both p a s t and a l s o d i s c u s s what a r t means t o the to us. d i s c u s s I n u i t a r t s and the p r e s e n t I n u i t l i f e . We w i l l I n u i t and what t h e i r a r t means How t o Use t h i s K i t : 1. Show the s l i d e s t o the c l a s s i n o r d e r ( 1 - 2 0 ) a l o n g w i t h the taped commentary o r , read a l o u d the commentary s c r i p t i n t h i s package. The t a p e , or s c r i p t , w i l l i n d i c a t e when t o change s l i d e s ( l i s t e n f o r the tone on the t a p e ) . 2. The a c t i v i t y sheet s h o u l d be g i v e n out a t the b e g i n n i n g of the l e s s o n as the t a s k s a r e t o be done a t v a r i o u s p o i n t s d u r i n g the p r e s e n t a t i o n ( t o g i v e you a break and v a r y the pace f o r the s t u d e n t s ) . The s c r i p t s w i l l i n d i c a t e where t o s t o p f o r each t a s k . 3. The a c t i v i t y sheet also includes a vocabulary search. You may want to give the words to your class before the presentation so they can be keeping their ears open for them during the commentary. These words are also underlined in your s c r i p t . 4. You w i l l also see on the s c r i p t s that there are places where class discussion should take place, and there are questions to structure that discussion given in the s c r i p t and on the tape. When you see the s l i d e s you w i l l probably have more ideas of things to discuss with your students. Kit Return: Please bring the k i t materials back to the Gallery when you come for the Workshop. We also welcome any written comments or suggestions you may have regarding the k i t . If you have l o s t a s l i d e , please phone us immediately so we can make a duplicate. There i s a $ 1 . 0 0 charge for each l o s t s l i d e , payable in cash upon your v i s i t to the Gallery. We hope that this k i t i s helpful to you and that your class enjoys i t . 1 3 1 SLIDE COMMENTARY SCRIPT INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT Introduction to the Class; This presentation has been planned to introduce you to the way of l i f e of the Inuit so that you w i l l be prepared for the "Inuit Arts and Culture" Workshop at the Surrey Art Gallery. Who knows another word for "Inuit"? Eskimo i s correct, but in Canada they are known as "Inuit" - a native word which means "the people". Alaskan natives are known as Eskimos. You a l l now have a worksheet which you w i l l be working on at various times during t h i s s l i d e presentation. Take a minute now to look at the word l i s t on the a c t i v i t y sheet so that you can l i s t e n for the meanings during the workshop. Slide #1 (Map) - As long as 28,000 years ago, there were people l i v i n g in the northern reaches of our continent'. These people lived in the harsh climate of the A r c t i c shown at the top of this map. Can you find the A r c t i c C i r c l e on the map? (pause) These people li v e d north and south of t h i s imaginary l i n e , a l l the way from Alaska to Greenland. The Inuit did not know there were other kinds of people in the world u n t i l Europeans sailed across the A t l a n t i c Ocean to the A r c t i c several hundred years ago. They came to hunt whales, to explore the land and sea for trade routes and find supplies of animal skins to be made into European fashions. European ladies wore corsets s t i f f e n e d with whale teeth, as well as sealskin clothing and accessories. Upper-class European gentlemen enjoyed clothes trimmed with seal and fox fur. Jewelry and ornaments made of ivory from walrus tusk were also popular 200 - 300 years ago. The Inuit had to develop a way of l i f e that ensured their survival in the cold, harsh climate and did not depend on contact with other people. You probably already know some things about the t r a d i t i o n a l Inuit l i f e . For instance, what type of winter houses did the Inuit once l i v e in? ... If you answered igloos, you are correct, although in summer they made sealskin tents. Now, most l i v e in houses much l i k e yours, especially in winter. Can you find Alert Bay on t h i s map? ... The next s l i d e you w i l l see i s a photograph of that area. (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #2 ( A l e r t Bay) - When e a r l y e x p l o r e r s s a i l e d t h e i r s h i p s t o t h e A r c t i c i n t h e summer s e a s o n when t h e water was not f r o z e n , t h e y saw l a n d s c a p e s l i k e t h i s . The p e o p l e o f t h e n o r t h l a n d had been c o p i n g w i t h t h i s e n v i r o n m e n t f o r many h u n d r e d s o f y e a r s . They had d e v e l o p e d t o o l s , t r a n s p o r t a t i o n , ways o f b u i l d i n g s h e l t e r , and c l o t h i n g t h a t h e l p e d them s u r v i v e w i t h o u t b r i c k h o u s e s , f u r n a c e s , e l e c t r i c i t y o r s n o w m o b i l e s . We c a n p u t t o g e t h e r a c l e a r p i c t u r e o f t h e o l d ways o f t h e I n u i t b e c a u s e t h e s e ways d i d n o t change d r a s t i c a l l y u n t i l t h e 1950's and 1960's. C o n s e q u e n t l y , we have p h o t o g r a p h s t a k e n by v i s i t o r s t o t h e A r c t i c w h i c h c l e a r l y show t h e o l d ways. T r a d i t i o n a l t o o l s , o b j e c t s and c l o t h i n g were e a s i l y c o l l e c t e d and s a v e d . P e o p l e were a b l e t o t r a v e l a b out w i t h t h e s m a l l I n u i t f a m i l y g r o u p s t h a t roamed t h e l a n d , t o o b s e r v e how t h e y l i v e d w i t h l i t t l e c o n t a c t w i t h o t h e r g r o u p s and w i t h o u t l a r g e s e t t l e m e n t s . The I n u i t s e t up camp where h u n t i n g and f i s h i n g were good. They moved when t h e y needed new h u n t i n g g r o u n d s o r wanted t o v i s i t o t h e r g r o u p s or Hudson Bay p o s t s f o r s u p p l i e s . (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #3 (Snow D r i f t s ) - In w i n t e r , t h e A r c t i c i s v e r y c o l d and c o v e r e d w i t h snow d r i f t s s h i f t e d a b o u t by t h e w i n d s . Much o f t h e o c e a n f r e e z e s o v e r t h i c k l y so t h a t i t i s d i f f i c u l t t o t e l l t h e l a n d f r o m t h e w a t e r . (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #4 ( W i n t e r V i l l a g e ) - The w i n t e r s i n t h e A r c t i c a r e v e r y l o n g and h a r d . In t h i s camp t h e p e o p l e a r e t a k i n g a d v a n t a g e o f d i m i n i s h i n g l i g h t t o p r e p a r e f o r t h e d a y s o f c o l d and d a r k n e s s , much as has been done f o r c e n t u r i e s . (STOP TAPE) T e a c h e r N o t e : Use t h e s e q u e s t i o n s a s a g u i d e t o a c l a s s d i s c u s s i o n a b o u t t h e s l i d e . 1. What p r o v i s i o n s have been made f o r : a) h o u s i n g ? b) t r a n s p o r t a t i o n ? c) c l o t h i n g ? 2. What c a n you t e l l a b o u t t h e b u i l d i n g m a t e r i a l s a v a i l a b l e ? (START TAPE) You have p r o b a b l y d i s c o v e r e d t h a t t h e h o u s e s which t h e I n u i t men have b u i l t a r e made o f snow b l o c k s . I n s i d e there was a p l a t f o r m ( a l s o made of snow) f o r s l e e p i n g . I n u i t who remember these i g l o o s , say t h a t they were v e r y c l e a n and cozy a l t h o u g h sometimes a snow b l o c k would c a v e i n with the w i n d . Of c o u r s e they melted i n summer, b u t t h e I n u i t c o u l d b u i l d a new i g l o o i n an hour i f t h e o l d one became damaged o r t h e f a m i l y u n d e r t o o k one o f t h e i r many moves (up t o t e n t i m e s a y e a r ) . T h e r e was a l w a y s snow t o b u i l d w i t h i n t h e w i n t e r , b u t as you can s e e , no t r e e s t o c u t down f o r b u i l d i n g s . S l e d s made from s c r a p s o f wood and a n i m a l bones t h a t t h e I n u i t f o u n d were powered by dog teams. The dogs p r o v i d e d an e n g i n e t h a t o n l y needed f o o d t o run - no m e c h a n i c s , no gas s t a t i o n s , no s p a r e p a r t s ! (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #5 ( T u n d r a V e g e t a t i o n ) - By May, much o f t h e snow has m e l t e d t o r e v e a l t h e t u n d r a l a n d . A l t h o u g h t h e snow m e l t s , i t i s n e v e r warm enough f o r t h e s o i l t o s o f t e n . P l a n t s must be v e r y h a r d y t o grow and s u r v i v e i n t h e s h o r t s e a s o n . (NEXT SLIDE) S I i d e #6 ( V e g e t a t i o n ) - T h e s e b e a r b e r r i e s , g r a s s and l i c h e n s a r e t y p i c a l o f t h e p l a n t s t h a t grow and p r o v i d e a t e m p o r a r y change o f d i e t f o r humans and a n i m a l s . Some a n i m a l s , s u c h as t h e c a r i b o u , s u r v i v e on t h e s e p l a n t s a l l y e a r , a d i e t t h e y must d i g f o r t h r o u g h t h e snow i n t h e w i n t e r months. When a l l o f t h e s e p l a n t s a r e g r o w i n g i n t h e s h o r t summer s e a s o n t h e y p r o v i d e a b e a u t i f u l , c o l o u r f u l change o f s c e n e r y from t h e w i n t e r snows. (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #7 (Summer Camp) - Summer means c h a n g e s f o r p e o p l e t o o . Even new h o u s e s ! The new h o u s e i s made o f d i f f e r e n t m a t e r i a l s , a new s t y l e and h a s d i f f e r e n t c o o k i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s . (STOP TAPE) T e a c h e r N o t e : L e a v e s l i d e #7 on t h e s c r e e n w h i l e t h e c l a s s d o e s a c t i v i t y #1 on t h e i r w o r k s h e e t s . (START TAPE) The women o f t h e f a m i l y c o n s t r u c t e d t h e s e summer t e n t s o u t o f w a t e r p r o o f s e a l s k i n s on a frame o f w h a l e bones and s t i c k s , w e i g h t e d down by s t o n e s . I n s i d e , t h e t e n t has a s l e e p i n g a r e a and a communal l i v i n g a r e a , b u t , u n l i k e i n t h e w i n t e r , most c o o k i n g i s done o u t d o o r s . 134 4 - T h i s t e n t i s e a s i l y p a c k e d and moved w i t h t h e f a m i l y . (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #8 ( E s k i m o Woman, John W h i t e , 16t h C e n t u r y ) - T h i s I n u i t woman must have been one o f t h e f i r s t t o have h e r p i c t u r e ( p o r t r a i t ) p a i n t e d . John White was t h e a r t i s t who p a i n t e d t h e p i c t u r e when he v i s i t e d t h e A r c t i c on a w h a l i n g b o a t 300 y e a r s ago, l o n g b e f o r e t h e r e were any w h i t e men l i v i n g i n t h a t p a r t o f t h e c o u n t r y or most o f Canada f o r t h a t m a t t e r ! The woman's o u t f i t i s n o t what E u r o p e a n s were used t o as f a s h i o n a b l e d r e s s f o r London or P a r i s , b u t i t t e l l s a l o t a b o u t t h e l i f e she l e a d . (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #9 ( F r e n c h Woman) - T h i s F r e n c h l a d y o f t h e same t i m e p e r i o d would c e r t a i n l y n o t have been c o m f o r t a b l e i n an A r c t i c W i n t e r ! Why n o t ? ... ( p a u s e f o r d i s c u s s i o n ) . RETURN TO S l i d e #8 Now t u r n t o y o u r a c t i v i t y s h e e t and do Task #2. (STOP TAPE) T e a c h e r Note: Leave s l i d e #8 on t h e s c r e e n . Have s t u d e n t s work i n d i v i d u a l l y , i n p a i r s or as a c l a s s g r o u p . (START TAPE) ( NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #10 (Woman w i t h u l u ) - The u l u , o r woman's k n i f e , i s b e i n g used by t h e woman t o c u t s e a l s k i n t h a t has been p r e p a r e d , by s c r a p i n g and s o f t e n i n g , t o be u s e d f o r c l o t h i n g . C a r i b o u s k i n would be p r e p a r e d i n t h e same way. O n l y women a r e a l l o w e d t o u s e t h e u l u b e c a u s e i t i s s u i t e d e s p e c i a l l y f o r t h e j o b s t h e y do. Men have d i f f e r e n t t o o l s b e c a u s e t h e y do d i f f e r e n t j o b s t h a n the women - h u n t i n g , f i s h i n g and b u i l d i n g s h e l t e r s . Women were r e s p o n s i b l e f o r making a l l o f t h e f a m i l y c l o t h e s ( f r o m b o o t s t o h o o d s ) , l o o k i n g a f t e r t h e s m a l l c h i l d r e n and t h e home, p r e p a r i n g f o o d , and making t h e summer t e n t . V e r y o f t e n i n s m a l l f a m i l y g r o u p s men and women would h e l p e a c h o t h e r w i t h t h e i r t a s k s so t h a t e v e r y t h i n g was done. (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #11 The f i n i s h e d o u t f i t , a l a d i e s a m a t i u k d o e s n o t l o o k much d i f f e r e n t f r o m t h e one w h i c h we have a l r e a d y s e e n , a l t h o u g h t h r e e h u n d r e d y e a r s have p a s s e d between t h e making o f t h e two o u t f i t s . What d i f f e r e n c e do you s e e i n t h i s o u t f i t ? ( p a u s e ) ( d e c o r a t i o n , beadwork) D e c o r a t i o n became p o s s i b l e when t h e I n u i t c o u l d t r a d e f u r s and f o o d f o r g l a s s b e a d s and b r i g h t l y c o l o u r e d 1 3 5 - 5 - thread with the Europeans of the Hudson's Bay Company or the European whalers. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #12 ( O i l Lamps) - This Inuit woman i s melting seal fat in an old soapstone lamp. This o i l i s not only used for cooking but also to l i g h t and heat the home. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #13 (Tent Interior) - Today the Inuit has a few more building materials available through stores established in settlements by white people. Now summer houses are made of canvas with wood frames and are "furnished" with sleeping bags and blankets rather than t r a d i t i o n a l animal fur robes. The basic layout remains much the same as in igloos or skin tents - there is a communal sleeping platform (everyone sleeps together!) and an area for cooking and other home a c t i v i t i e s . (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #14 (Caribou) - This animal running across the tundra (the barren a r c t i c land) i s a caribou enjoying the b r i e f period of summer when the a r c t i c i s nearly snow free and there i s daylight almost 24 hours a day. He has been very important to the Inuit l i f e s t y l e . Every part of him i s useful to the Inuit: he i s used for food, for antler and bone to make tools and for his fur coat to make warm clothes. Where have you seen th i s coat before? (In s l i d e #8) The caribou l i v e s in large herds that travel across the A r c t i c in search of food. The Inuit followed these herds so that they could hunt them for s u r v i v a l . , According to Inuit t r a d i t i o n , i t was the man who hunted and fished to provide food and the animal skins, bones and sinew needed for clothes, tools and building materials. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #15 (Fishing Weir) - Fishing provides an important food source for the Inuit during times of the year when animals cannot be found to hunt. Summer fi s h i n g i s accomplished by using these weirs. A c t i v i t y #3 explores how these work. (STOP THE TAPE) Teacher Note: Turn to the a c t i v i t y sheet and do task #3, leaving s l i d e #15 on the screen). (START TAPE) 136 - 6 - (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #16 (Winter Fishing Hole) - In winter the fi s h i n g process i s much more d i f f i c u l t . Task #4 on the a c t i v i t y sheet is about winter f i s h i n g . Go to that task now! (STOP TAPE) Teacher Note: Leave s l i d e #16 on the screen while the students complete task #4. (START TAPE) (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #17 (Hunter & Tent) - This Inuit hunter, with harpoon in hand, i s getting ready for a day's hunting. Because the snow and ice have melted, his winter dog sled is no longer a means of t r a v e l . Instead, he travels by water in a kayak l i k e the one beside him or an umiak which i s a larger,.open boat for several people. Can you t e l l what materials are used to build the kayak? ... The Inuit could not run down to the lumber yard or hardware store to pick up supplies, so they used sealskins stretched over a frame of antlers and pieces of wood. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #18 ( A r t i f a c t s ) - Many of the things that the Inuit used for thousands of years are s t i l l in use by those Inuit who l i v e in very isolated areas. The tools are s t i l l useful because they are made from materials readily available in the environment - such as bone, soapstone and ivory - and have been altered by the Inuit over the years to be perfect for the work that needs to be done. We can refer to these tools as a r t i f a c t s . Art i fact i s the word used by people who study cultures to describe the things that people of a p a r t i c u l a r culture create for their p a r t i c u l a r l i f e s t y l e . (STOP TAPE) Teacher Note: Instruct the c l a s s to turn to the a c t i v i t y sheet for task #5, leaving s l i d e #18 on the screen). (START TAPE) (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #19 Today, although the A r c t i c environment i s s t i l l harsh, the Inuit has new ways of surviving the long, b i t t e r 1 3 7 - 7 - winters. The igloo i s no longer necessary as a winter home, although here we see that this family has used snow blocks to build a tunnel to get out of their house which i s buried by a snow d r i f t . (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #20 (Cape Dorset at Night) - Today many Inuit have l e f t the l i f e that required them to move often to follow the herds of animals upon whom their l i f e depended. This old l i f e s t y l e required them to l i v e in small groups that could be e a s i l y moved. Today, the white man and a decrease in the animal population have brought a new l i f e s t y l e to the A r c t i c . Settlements of a more permanent nature have sprung up in areas that are accessible to southern c i t i e s by a i r or ship. Houses much l i k e ours are now b u i l t with materials shipped in from the south. Schools and churches have been b u i l t . Stores import food, clothing and household goods so that hunting i s no longer necessary for s u r v i v a l . Winter travel over the ice and snow and summer travel in open water have changed with the introduction of snowmobiles, outboard motors and aluminum boats. The Inuit now find themselves in the d i f f i c u l t position of trying to find ways to cope with this change in l i f e s t y l e and new means of earning a l i v i n g in settlements such as t h i s at Cape Dorset. On your v i s i t to the Surrey Art Gallery we w i l l talk about Inuit l i f e and a r t s . We w i l l look at their art of the past and what i t t e l l s us about them. We w i l l also look at Inuit art today and how the Inuit are using their art as a means of supporting themselves in a new l i f e s t y l e . We w i l l talk about what art means to the Inuit. 138 SURREY ART GALLERY: INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE-PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT SLIDE LIST: 1) Map of A r c t i c . 2) A r c t i c Bay - Midnight i n May, D. Sutherland, photo. 3) Drifted snow, D. Sutherland, photo. 4) Winter Camp, Pond Inlet, NWT, Information Canada Photograph, D. Wilkinson, 1964. 5) Tundra near Baker Lake in May, D. Sutherland, photo. 6) Tundra plant l i f e - stereocavlon - aldinum - lichen D. Sutherland, photo. 7) An eskimo family cooking a meal in front of their skin tent at the old f i s h i n g ground, Pelly Bay, NWT, Information Canada Photograph, D. Wilkinson, 1964. 8) John Whyte, Eskimo Woman, 1600's. 9) Fragonard, La B i l l e t Doux, c. 1770-80, o i l on canvas, 33 x 27 inches. Cutting scraped seal with ulu, Pond Inlet, D. Sutherland, photo. Jean Siatsuik with a new amatiuk, Baker Lake, D. Sutherland, photo. Seal fat being melted in the t r a d i t i o n a l , primitive lamp, Information Canada Photograph, D. Wilkinson, 1953. Inside a "modern tent". Caribou. An Eskimo f i s h i n g in the ancient manner with a stone weir and early implements, Information Canada Photograph, D. Wilkinson. An.Inuit fisherman inside a windbreak at a fi s h i n g hole, Information Canada Photograph, D. Wilkinson, 4/58. An Eskimo hunter with a harpoon beside a kayak and a skin tent, GNWT, photo. A r t i f a c t s . Snow tunnel on a roof. Cape Dorset at night. /M0785  140 SURREY ART GALLERY; INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP ; PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT ULU TASK / / l WRITE A GOOD AD FOR THE 'ARCTIC NEWS' THAT DESCRIBES THE HOUSE IN THE SLIDE WHICH AN ESKIMO FAMILY IS MOVING AWAY FROM. YOUR AD SHOULD DESCRIBE THE HOUSE, TELL ABOUT ITS LOCATION, WHAT ITS MADE FROM, WHY THE FAMILY IS MOVING, WHY IT IS A GOOD HOUSE FOR AN INUIT FAMILY AND WHAT IT IS LIKE INSIDE. 2. 141 FOR THE NEXT A ACTIVITIES LOOK AT THE SLIDE ON THE SCREEN FOR CLUES!!! #2 AS AN ARTIST ON AN EXPLORERS EXPEDITION YOU PAINTED THIS PICTURE TO SHOW A WOMAN OF THE ARCTIC. LOOK CLOSELY AT THE CLOTHING OF THE WOMAN IN THE PICTURE TO FIND 'CLUES' THAT TELL YOU SOMETHING ABOUT INUIT LIFE 300 YEARS AGO. TOR EACH QUESTION BELOW, WRITE A) THE ANSWER I! AND B) WHAT 'CLUES' GAVE YOU THAT ANSWER. 1) WHAT IS THE WEATHER LIKE IN THE ARCTIC? 2) WHAT ANIMALS WERE FOUND IN THE AREA? 3) WHAT WERE SOME OF THE WOMAN'S ACTIVITIES? 3. 142 AS A TRAVELLER IN THE TUNDRA YOU HAVE COME ACROSS THESE PILES OF ROCKS THAT SEEM TO HAVE SOME SORT OF SPECIAL FORMATION. IN THE SPACES BETWEEN THE STONES YOU FOUND SOME <g? | I (I 1 H <7 WHAT WENT ON HERE? HOW DID THESE ROCK PILES WORK? DRAW YOUR IDEA ON THE DIAGRAM BELQW THIS WINTER DAY SEEMS QUITE BRIGHT AND MILD BUT WHAT TELLS YOU THAT IT MIGHT BE VERY COLD ?7?? HOW THICK DO YOU SUPPOSE THE ICE IS?? WHAT CLUES DID YOU USE TO GET THESE ANSWERS??? 143 TASK 0 5 YOU HAVE HAD A SUCCESSFUL SEARCH FOR ARTIFACTS AND FOUND ALL OF THESE I NOW THE PROBLEM IS TO TRY TO DECIDE WHAT THEY WERE USED FOR • 1 1 • • • MATCH THE NUMBER BESIDE EACH ARTIFACT WITH THE WORD BELOW THAT BEST DESCRIBES ITS USE SEWING HUNTING FISHING CARVING PERSONAL GROOMING PLAYING 144 SURREY ART- GALLERY: INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP - PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT TEACHER ANSWER SHEET WORD LIST o e o LISTEN FOR/THESE NEW WORDS\DURING THE PRESENTATION INUIT - 'the people,' the term used by the Eskimo to ref e r to themselves TUNDRA - barren, a r c t i c land AMAT1UK - vomens' parka KAYAK - small, single-passenger boat made of sealsk i n , over a wood or bone frame, propelled by paddle UMIAK - larger, open boat f o r several passengers HARPOON - a type of spear attached to i t s case by a long thong so that i t can be retrieved a f t e r throwing IGLOO - snowblock house ARTIFACTS - objects that people of a p a r t i c u l a r culture created f o r t h e i r p a r t i c u l a r l i f e s t y l e WEIR - low stone walls b u i l t along shore to trap f i s h for spearing ULU - womens1 knife « TASK ill WRITE A GOOD AD FOR THE 'ARCTIC NEWS' THAT DESCRIBES THE HOUSE IN THE SLIDE WHICH AN ESKIMO FAMILY IS MOVING AWAY FROM. YOUR AD SHOULD DESCRIBE THE HOUSE, TELL ABOUT ITS LOCATION, WHAT IT IS MADE FROM, WHY THE FAMILY IS MOVING, WHY IT IS A GOOD HOUSE FOR AN INUIT FAMILY AND WHAT IT IS LIKE INSIDE. Foil Sf*K.£ ! 145 FOR THE NEXT A ACTIVITIES LOOK AT THE SLIDE ON THE SCREEN FOR CLUES!!.* TASK ill AS AN ARTIST ON AN EXPLORER'S EXPEDITION YOU PAINTED THIS PICTURE TO SHOW A WOMAN OF THE ARCTIC. LOOK CLOSELY AT THE CLOTHING OF THE WOMAN IN THE PICTURE TO FIND 'CLUES' THAT TELL YOU SOMETHING ABOUT INUIT LIFE 300 YEARS AGO. FOR EACH QUESTION BELOW, WRITE A) THE ANSWER!! AND B) WHAT 'CLUES' GAVE YOU THAT ANSWER. WHAT IS THE WEATHER LIKE IN THE ARCTIC? A. Very cold B. Clues: - layers of clot h i n g - clothes made of warm fur - baby needs to be protected - t a l l boots for snow protection WHAT ANIMALS WERE FOUND IN THE AREA? A. Seals, caribou B. Clues: - Fur of clothing looks l i k e s e a l , and caribou, the Inuit used the fur of the animals in th e i r area. WHAT WERE SOME OF THE WOMAN'S ACTIVITIES? A. Tending babies, making clothi n g , pre- paring skins and sewing them together B. Clues: - room for baby i n the amatiuk - clothing looks handmade 3. 146 TASK if 3 AS A TRAVELLER IN THE TUNDRA YOU HAVE COME ACROSS THESE PILES OF ROCKS THAT SEEM TO HAVE SOME SORT OF SPECIAL FORMATION. IN THE SPACES BETWEEN THE STONES YOU FOUND SOME <*?| I [ I | (| AND . " " WHAT WENT ON HERE? HOW DID THESE ROCK PILES WORK? DRAW YOUR IDEA ON THE DIAGRAM BELOW See what the students come up with! b a s i c a l l y , the f i s h were trapped i n the shallow water of the weir and the fishermen waded i n and speared them with the implement shown above. TASK ill* THIS WINTER DAY SEEMS QUITE BRIGHT AND MILD BUT WHAT TELLS YOU THAT IT MIGHT BE VERY COLD ???? - the fisherman i s warmly dressed - he has b u i l t a w a l l to p r o t e c t himself from the wind HOW THICK DO YOU SUPPOSE THE ICE IS?? - very, he has a long f i s h i n g l i n e WHAT CLUES DID YOU USE TC GET THESE ANSWERS??? 147 TASK 0 5 YOU HAVE HAD A SUCCESSFUL SEARCH FOR ARTIFACTS AND FOUND ALL OF THESE I ; • • NOW THE PROBLEM IS TO TRY TO DECIDE WHAT THEY WERE USED FOR III MATCH THE NUMBER BESIDE EACH ARTIFACT WITH THE WORD BELOW THAT BEST DESCRIBES ITS USE SEWING - 6 HUNTING - 1 , 9 , 4 , 3 , 1 3 FISHING - 1 4 , 1 5 , 1 2 , 1 0 CARVING - 9 PERSONAL GROOMING - 2 , 1 1 , 7 PLAYING - 5 148 APPENDIX 6 149 SURREY ART GALLERY: I n u i t A r t s and C u l t u r e Workshop INSTRUCTOR NOTE: The s l i d e sequences are o f t e n i n t e r r u p t e d by s u g g e s t i o n s f o r showing the hands-on m a t e r i a l s where they are r e l e v a n t t o the t e x t . As an a l t e r n a t i v e you c o u l d show t h e hands-on o b j e c t s a t the end. I n the s l i d e p r e s e n t a t i o n you and y o u r t e a c h e r saw b e f o r e coming t o the g a l l e r y t o d a y , you l e a r n e d a l i t t l e about the t r a d i t i o n a l ways of l i f e of the I n u i t . In our p r e s e n t a t i o n h e r e we are g o i n g t o t a l k about the a r t s o the I n u i t ; how t h e y were a p a r t o f t h e I n u i t ' s p a s t l i f e s t y l e and how they have h e l p e d t h e I n u i t cope w i t h t h e i r new l i f e - s t y l e o f the p a s t t h i r t y y e a r s . S l i d e #1 ( P i t s e o l a k , Happy G i r l s , 1967, f e l t pen d r a w i n g ) . P i t s e o l a k i s an I n u i t woman who now l i v e s i n Cape D o r s e t On B a f f i n I s l a n d . Today she i s w e l l known as an a r t i s t . She l i v e s i n a c l a p b o a r d bungalow w i t h most o f t h e c o n v e n i e n c e s we e x p e c t - k i t c h e n a p p l i a n c e s , t e l e p h o n e , c o m f o r t a b l e f u r n i t u r e . She e a t s much as we do. However, she remembers t h a t most o f h e r l i f e she l i v e d as the I n u i t had done f o r many hundreds o f y e a r s . I n f a c t , u n t i l t h e e a r l y 1960's most I n u i t i n P i t s e o l a k 1 5 0 r e g i o n d w e l t i n i g l o o s and s k i n t e n t s , moved about f r e q u e n t l y and l i v e d by h u n t i n g . P i t s e o l a k was b o r n sometime around 1900, and remembers he r c h i l d h o o d as b e i n g happy, as she shows i n t h i s d r a w i n g . She remembers p l a y i n g m a k e - b e l i e v e , c a t c h , and a game q u i t e l i k e t e n n i s . She remembers her f a t h e r t e l l i n g the c h i l d r e n a l l o f the o l d legends d u r i n g the l o n g , d a r k , w i n t e r e v e n i n g s . (You w i l l hear one of t h e s e l a t e r i n t h i s p r e s e n t a t i o n ) . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #2 ( P i t s e o l a k , Both i n Summer and i n W i n t e r We Moved a L o t , 1970, f e l t pen drawing) M a r r i e d l i f e began e a r l y f o r P i t s e o l a k as i t d i d f o r most I n u i t . L i k e h e r f a t h e r , h e r husband hunted i n the o l d way, f o l l o w i n g the c a r i b o o i n w i n t e r , o f t e n moving t e n times a y e a r . They v i s i t e d the s e t t l e m e n t t h a t was growing w i t h t h e e s t a b l i s h m e n t of the Hudson Bay Company a t Cape D o r s e t o n l y t o g e t s u p p l i e s . For example, they may need a wooden boat t o r e p l a c e the s e a l s k i n b o a t s t h a t had been sewn by the women t o move the f a m i l y and b e l o n g i n g s , o r canvas t o r e p l a c e s k i n s f o r making summer t e n t s . Even though t h i s l o n e l y l i f e was o f t e n d i f f i c u l t ( f o r example, when the hunt was bad, t h e f a m i l y went h u n g r y ) , P i t s e o l a k remembers i t as a l i f e w i t h l e s s w o r r i e s than today. Everyone worked t o g e t h e r so t h a t t h e r e was f o o d , s h e l t e r and c l o t h i n g f o r a l l . 151 I n the p a s t , the I n u i t used t h e i r c r e a t i v e t a l e n t s t o make and d e c o r a t e o b j e c t s t h a t they needed as p a r t o f t h e i r d a i l y l i f e - t o o l s , c l o t h i n g and game p i e c e s . They d i d not make t h i n g s j u s t t o lo o k a t and e n j o y . The I n u i t would have thought i t s t r a n g e t h a t we have p a i n t i n g s and s c u l p t u r e s i n our homes j u s t f o r en- joyment. The main r e a s o n f o r t h i s i s , o f c o u r s e , t h a t they moved about so o f t e n t h a t they d i d not want t o c a r r y any more t h i n g s t h a n were n e c e s s a r y . Have you e v e r gone h i k i n g and p u t too much i n your knap- sack? Imagine h a v i n g t o move your whole bedroom f u l l of s t u f f t h a t way! NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #3 (Photo o f I n u i t i n f u r p a r k a s ) . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Show 1) n e e d l e c a s e , 2) p i e c e o f c a r i b o u h i d e , p o i n t i n g o u t how the h o l l o w c a r i b o u h a i r s a c t as i n s u l a t i o n , 3) h i d e s c r a p e r , and 4) u l u . The women i n the I n u i t f a m i l y made a l l o f t h e f a m i l i e s ' c l o t h i n g . Each p e r s o n had two f u r pa r k a s (one w i t h the f u r f a c i n g i n s i d e f o r warmth and the o t h e r w i t h the f u r f a c i n g o u t ) , p a n t s , one t o t h r e e p a i r s o f l e g g i n g s , and socks and b o o t s . E v e r y t h i n g was made o f a n i m a l s k i n o r f u r , u s u a l l y from the c a r i b o u . The women were v e r y proud of t h e i r work and were c a r e f u l t o d e c o r a t e t h e i r f a m i l i e s ' c l o t h i n g so t h a t they always l o o k e d n i c e . 1 5 2 T h i s was one o f the ways they c o u l d be c r e a t i v e . T h i i s how P i t s e o l a k t a l k s about h er p a r k a s : "When I made a p a r k a I used t o t r y t o make i t the way I wanted i t t o l o o k . I would t r y t o make i t l o o k v e r y good. I t was n o t easy and I used t o sew on a p a r k a f o r many days. We alway used the f i n e s t s k i n o f the young c a r i b o u f o r the head of the p a r k a and, on t o p , we would put l i t t l e e a r s from the baby c a r i b o u . I t l o o k e d v e r y n i c e . I would a l s o make p a t t e r n s and d e s i g n s w i t h d i f f e r e n t - c o l o u r e d s k i n s . " NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #4 ( S k i n and f u r parkas) As you saw i n your c l a s s r o o m p r e s e n t a t i o n , t h e women used beads, and c o l o u r e d t h r e a d s t o d e c o r a t e c l o t h e s . On t h i s p a r k a , n o t i c e the f u r "baby" hood on the amatiuk (woman's p a r k a ) . The women a l s o used d i f f e r e n t c o l o u r s o f f u r t o c u t out a n i m a l shapes which they s t u c k t o the i n s i d e w a l l o f t h e i g l o o t o i l l u s t r a t e s t o r i e s they t o l d t o e n t e r t a i n t he c h i l d r e n . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #5 (Old B e r i n g Sea implem e n t ) . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Show f i s h i n g g e a r . Show: 1) d i p p e r 2) harpoon p o i n t and 3) w h i t t l i n g k n i f e . 1 5 3 For the t r a d i t i o n a l I n u i t way of l i f e , the men hunted and f i s h e d . They hunted c a r i b o u , s e a l , whale and other animals of the A r c t i c . A l l p a r t s of the animal were used; the s k i n f o r c l o t h i n g , t e n t s , and b l a n k e t s ; the bones f o r c a r v i n g v a r i o u s t o o l s and implements; and the sinew f o r thread, l i n e and l a c i n g m a t e r i a l s . F i s h were an important p a r t of the d i e t . In w i n t e r , f r o z e n f i s h were wrapped i n s k i n s and used as s l e i g h runners u n t i l they had to be thawed f o r food.' A l l of the t o o l s needed f o r the men's a c t i v i t i e s had to be made by the hunter h i m s e l f using bone,, i v o r y , d r i f t wood, s o f t stone or a n t l e r s . He carved the t o o l h i m s e l f , perhaps with a k n i f e , a snow k n i f e or a p i c k . Then he might carve or s c r a t c h a design i n t o i t to decorate i t or t o t e l l a s t o r y about something t h a t happened with t h a t t o o l . What do you suppose t h i s implement might have been used f o r ? Look at the shape of the p i e c e and t r y to f i g u r e out what animal the designs r e p r e s e n t to give you c l u e s . N E X T SLIDE: S l i d e #6 (Snow goggles) Think of a sunny, snowy w i n t e r day. Can you remember how b r i g h t i t i s on a day l i k e t h a t and how the l i g h t h u r ts your eyes? You can imagine how much of a problem t h i s i s i n the A r c t i c w i n t e r when there are m i l e s , and m i l e s , and m i l e s of u n i n t e r r u p t e d g l a r i n g 154 snow. The I n u i t d eveloped t h e s e "snow g o g g l e s " t o wear on such days. The s l i t s reduce t h e amount of l i g h t g e t t i n g t o the eyes w h i l e s t i l l a l l o w i n g the pers o n enough space t o see out. They are c a r v e d from i v o r y ( p r o b a b l y from a w a l r u s t u s k ) . N o t i c e how the c r a f t s m a n has s c r a t c h e d a v e r y s i m p l e d e s i g n of l i n e s t o d e c o r a t e the smooth s u r f a c e . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #7 ( M i n i a t u r e a n i m a l s c u l p t u r e s ) . A l l o f the I n u i t groups b e l i e v e d t h a t a n i m a l s were i n t e l l i g e n t b e i n g s who had s o u l s . S p e c i a l a t t e n t i o n was g i v e n t o p l e a s i n g them. The h u n t e r s had a g r e a t r e s p e c t f o r the a n i m a l s and never k i l l e d more than they needed f o r t h e i r own s u r v i v a l . They were than k - f u l t o the a n i m a l s they hunted f o r h e l p i n g t o s u p p o r t the l i f e o f the h u n t e r . They a l s o b e l i e v e d t h a t each p e r s o n had some p e r s o n a l s p i r i t p r o t e c t o r who u s u a l l y was i n t h e form of an a n i m a l who had appeared t o h e l p the p e r s o n a t some i n c i d e n t i n h i s l a t e c h i l d h o o d . Sometimes the h u n t e r would do s m a l l c a r v i n g s o f the a n i m a l as a form o f t h a n k s . They were s m a l l enough t o s l i p i n t o a p o c k e t . U s u a l l y they were c a r v e d o ut o f bone, i v o r y o r a n t l e r and l e s s o f t e n , s t o n e , as s t o n e was heavy t o c a r r y . They were s i m p l e i n shape. Some- ti m e s t h i n g s were l e f t o f f , n o t because t h e I n u i t was not a good c a r v e r b u t because they l i k e t o do j u s t enough d e t a i l t o make a l i k e n e s s . These e a r l y 1 5 5 " s c u l p t o r s " b e l i e v e d t h a t the s p i r i t o f t h e a n i m a l was i n the m a t e r i a l chosen f o r c a r v i n g and i t was t h e i r j o b t o c a r v e i n o r d e r t o r e l e a s e the shape o f t h a t a n i m a l . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #8 (Pre World War I I c a r v i n g s f o r I g l o o k ) . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: See how many o f t h e s e c a r v i n g s you can i d e n t i f y . What a n i m a l s are t h e r e ? What c o u l d t h e t o o l s be used f o r ? What m a t e r i a l s have been used f o r thes e p i e c e s ? NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #9 (Thule p e r i o d , B i r d F i g u r e s , i v o r y , Ih X 2") Look how s i m p l e t h e s e b i r d shapes a r e . The maker has d e c o r a t e d them w i t h p a t t e r n s o f dot s s c r a t c h e d on t o g i v e some more d e t a i l . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #10 (Inukchuk) The h u n t e r s a l s o c o n s t r u c t e d t h e s e huge sto n e works! What do you t h i n k t h i s b i g p i l e o f r o c k s i s supposed t o be? ... T h i s g i a n t i s c a l l e d an Inukchuk. The h u n t e r s o f l o n g ago would b u i l d him on a r i s e o f l a n d t o h e l p them i n t h e c a r i b o u hunt. The c u r i o u s c a r i b o u would come c l o s e t o t h e g i a n t , become f r i g h t e n e d by i t and r u n away towards an a r e a where the h u n t e r s w a i t e d . Sometimes t h e women and c h i l d r e n 156 would h i d e b e h i n d i t and t h e n shout and wave t o h e l p s c a r e t h e c a r i b o u towards t h e h u n t e r s . We might c a l l t h i s b i g s t r u c t u r e a s t a t u e o r a s c u l p t u r e , b u t t o the I n u i t i t had a v e r y p r a c t i c a l purpose. NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #11 (Masks) The o t h e r p e r s o n i n t r a d i t i o n a l I n u i t s o c i e t y who i n f l u e n c e d the p r o d u c t i o n o f o b j e c t s was the shaman or 'angakor.' T h i s p e r s o n , u s u a l l y a man, was supposed t o have the a b i l i t y t o communicate w i t h the s p i r i t s . He would put h i m s e l f i n t o t r a n c e s t o h e a r the i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t t h e s p i r i t s would g i v e him about the hunt, such as where a n i m a l s and m i s s i n g p e o p l e were. These t r a n c e s were c a l l e d s p i r i t - f l i g h t s . He b e l i e v e d he a c t u a l l y t r a n s f o r m e d i n t o the s p i r i t i t - s e l f . O f t e n he would use magic t r i c k s t o impress h i s audience when he r e l a t e d t h e s e s t o r i e s . A l t h o u g h he u s u a l l y d i d n ' t c a r v e , h i s s t o r i e s t o l d c a r v e r s what the s p i r i t s l o o k e d l i k e so they c o u l d c a r v e them. He a l s o needed ornaments and sometimes masks t o wear and he had p e o p l e c a r v e boxes t o c a t c h s p i r i t s w i t h . H i s performance c o u l d be v e r y s c a r y ! NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #12 (Top: D o r s e t c u l t u r e , A d v e r j o r , 8") (Bottom: D o r s e t c u l t u r e , clOOO AD, c a r i b o u a n t l e r , 4 V ) The d e c o r a t i v e c a r v i n g t h a t was done f o r the shaman or f o r the h u n t e r s t h e m s e l v e s would have l o o k e d l i k e t h i s . The bottom p i e c e i s a c a r v e d c a r i b o u a n t l e r . Can you p i c k o u t some of t h e images on t h i s p i e c e ? 1 5 7 NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #13 ( D o l l ) Toys and games were e n j o y e d by the I n u i t c h i l d r e n and a d u l t s . D o l l s and game p i e c e s were c a r v e d much l i k e the s m a l l a n i m a l s c u l p t u r e s . T h i s d o l l i s a good ex- ample . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Show: 1) bone game and 2) p i n and cup game NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #14 ( P i p e s ) These p i p e s are a l i t t l e newer, b u t have been carved i n a s i m i l a r t e c h n i q u e . They were c a r v e d s p e c i f i c a l l y t o t r a d e w i t h the w h i t e w h a l e r s and t r a d e r s . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #15 (Thule c u l t u r e , Marrow P i c k , i v o r y ) T h i s t o o l was used f o r p i c k i n g the marrow out o f bones. N o t i c e i t s b e a u t i f u l h a n d l e . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #16 (Unknown, Hunter, pre-1900, i v o r y ) A l t h o u g h t h e I n u i t r a r e l y c a r v e d p i e c e s j u s t f o r t h e sake of the o b j e c t i t s e l f , t h i s p i e c e from t h e l a t e 1800"s might have been an e x c e p t i o n . A l t h o u g h t h i s f i g u r e i s v e r y s i m p l e (not a l o t o f d e t a i l s ) i t i s v e r y e x p r e s s i v e . Can you t e l l what the h u n t e r i s d o i n g and how he i s f e e l i n g ? The way t h e c a r v e r has posed the f i g u r e t e l l s an e x c i t i n g s t o r y ! 158 The o l d ways d i d n ' t end f o r the I n u i t u n t i l about t h i r t y y e a r s ago. P i t s e o l a k s a y s : " I t h i n k the new tim e s s t a r t e d f o r Eskimos a f t e r the w h i t e p e o p l e ' s war, when the w h i t e men began t o make many houses i n the A r c t i c . Eskimos began t o move i n t o the s e t t l e m e n t s and t h e n the w h i t e p o e p l e s t a r t e d h e l p i n g us t o g e t t h e s e houses. That's why l i f e changed. I don't t h i n k everybody was t o o f o n d o f moving from the camps, b u t they s t i l l came anyway.... They are w o r k i n g f o r the w h i t e man now." The war she r e f e r s t o i s the Second World War which ended i n 19 45. Up u n t i l t h a t time I n u i t c o n t a c t w i t h the w h i t e man was l i m i t e d . He v i s i s t e d t h e few Hudson Bay p o s t s p e r i o d i c a l l y t o t r a d e f u r s f o r some f o o d s t u f f s , sewing m a t e r i a l s such as d u f f l e w o o l , m e t a l n e e d l e s , b u t t o n s and c o l o u r e d t h r e d s , and new t o o l s - m e t a l k n i v e s , guns and p o t s and pans. A few had worked on the whale b o a t s . I n the new s e t t l e m e n t s t h a t the w h i t e man s e t up a t Cape D o r s e t and Baker Lake and a t o t h e r s i t e s , t h e r e were s u p p l y s t o r e s , government s e r v i c e s , m e d i c a l s e r v i c e s and C h r i s t i a n m i s s i o n a r i e s . The m i s s i o n a r i e s s e t up s c h o o l s t h a t n o t o n l y attempted t o t e a c h the I n u i t about C h r i s t i a n i t y , but a l s o how t o r e a d and w r i t e and speak E n g l i s h . T h i s was t h e f i r s t t he I n u i t had seen of s c h o o l s . B e f o r e , a l l t e a c h i n g t h a t was needed took p l a c e i n t h e home. 1 5 9 A t the end o f World War I I , the c a r i b o u h e r d had been g r e a t l y d e p l e t e d , c a u s i n g many f a m i l i e s t o s u f f e r from s t a r v a t i o n and e v e n t u a l l y d i s e a s e . These I n u i t 0 began t o d r i f t t o the s e t t l e m e n t s f o r h e l p : d o c t o r s , f o o d and s h e l t e r . Many h u n t e r s l e f t t h e i r w i v e s and f a m i l i e s t o be c a r e d f o r i n the s e t t l e m e n t s and went back o u t t o the i c e f i e l d s t o hunt. I n t i m e , c h i l d r e n s t a r t e d t o go t o s c h o o l and the co n v e n i e n c e s p r o v i d e d i n the s e t t l e m e n t made l e s s work and more l e i s u r e t ime f o r the women. G r a d u a l l y , a l t h o u g h they mssed t h e o l d ways and o f t e n l e f t s e t t l e m e n t s i n h u n t i n g season, t h e I n u i t became de- pendent on the new ways. They d i d not want t o g i v e up t h e new houses b u i l t by t h e w h i t e man, t h e i m p o r t e d f o o d , the new t y p e of c l o t h e r s . The problem was - how were they t o e a r n a l i v i n g , t o pay f o r a l l o f th e s e t h i n g s ? The government s e t up s e v e r a l s p e c i a l p r o j e c t s t o employ t h e I n u i t , b u t the p r o j e c t s were o f t e n u n s u c c e s s f u l . The I n u i t were not used t o work- i n g f o r someone e l s e , o r d o i n g work t h a t gave money i n - s t e a d of meat o r h i d e s . They were not used t o the w h i t e man's i d e a o f w o r k i n g t i m e . They were used t o d o i n g t h i n g s as they were needed, not d u r i n g any p a r t i c u l a r h o u r s . F i n a l l y , someone had the i d e a t o make use o f t h e I n u i t ' s c r a f t s k i l l s . James Houston went t o Cape D o r s e t i n 1957 as a c r a f t development o f f i c e r . He was an a r t i s t h i m s e l f and was t h e r e f o r e a s s i g n e d t o a c t as an a d v i s o r / t e a c h e r . 160 S i n c e many women d i d n ' t l e a v e the s e t t l e m e n t , even d u r i n g h u n t i n g s e a s o n , they were encouraged t o sew a r t i c l e s t h a t Houston c o u l d s e l l f o r them i n the s o u t h . P i t s e o l a k was one o f the women who sewed t o e a r n a l i v i n g . Here i s how she d e s c r i b e s i t : "At f i r s t , a f t e r Sowmik (Houston) came, I d i d l o t s o f sewing. I made parkas and d u f f e l socks w i t h d e s i g n s . L o t s o f women began t o work - any k i n d of woman so l o n g as they c o u l d sew. I used t o embroider a n i m a l s and a l l k i n d s o f l i v i n g t h i n g s . But i t was always $12 f o r a p a r k a - even though i t was h a r d t o do." NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #17 (Parka) #18 ( W a l l Hanging, Manguagsualuk) #19 ( W a l l Hanging, Angnaqqaq) INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Show: 1) p a r k a , 2) m i t t s , 3) s o c k s , 4) w a l l h a n g i n g s . Sewing the s o f t d u f f l e c l o t h was a much e a s i e r j o b than i t had been t o sew tough a n i m a l h i d e s w i t h bone n e e d l e s . The c r a f t o f f i c e r t o l d the craftswomen what c o l o u r s t o use f o r the parkas so t h a t they would a p p e a l t o the s o u t h e r n e r s who would buy them. However, the d e s i g n s t h a t t h e women chose t o d e c o r a t e t h e b o r d e r o f t h e p a r k a show many shapes from t h e p a s t - h i d e s , a n i m a l s , h u n t e r s and c a r v e r s , i g l o o s and t h e s p i r i t c h a r a c t e r from t r a d i t i o n a l s t o r i e s . 161 Designs were then embroidered or made from cutouts of other coloured f a b r i c and sewn onto the parka - a technique c a l l e d applique. Wall hangings were made i n the same manner. The f i r s t white men to v i s i t the north were pa r t i c u - l a r l y attracted to the sculpture of the Inuit people. Some of the f i r s t v i s i t o r s i n the late 1940's and early 1950's took the sculptures home to the southern c i t i e s where they showed them to handicraft associa- tions, g a l l e r i e s and government o f f i c i a l s . When the sculptures were offered for sale, they were sold quickly and soon there was a demand for more. When the c r a f t o f f i c e r s began to esta b l i s h themselves i n the north, they encouraged the hunters to bring them work to s e l l . The hunters l i k e d working i n this way because they could do small carvings while they were on hunting expeditions as well as while they were staying i n the settlement. Soon, there was a need for space to be set aside for workshops at the settlements. The c r a f t s o f f i c e r s brought new knives and power tools to the workshops. They gave suggestions as to what the Inuit might carve to appeal to the buyers in the south, yet remain d i s t i n c t l y Inuit. Sculpture i s the only art form that we now associate with the Inuit that was actually a part of th e i r past way of l i f e . White man's influence has changed sculpture, but i t has not ruined i t . There are s t i l l many t r a d i t i o n a l elements i n the work. 162 NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #20 (Rocks) Today, most I n u i t s c u l p t u r e i s made from stone w h i c h i s found under the snow i n s p r i n g or i s q u a r r i e d a t s e v e r a l p l a c e s f a r from the s e t t l e m e n t s . The I n u i t e n j o y the s e a r c h f o r the stone because i t i n v o l v e s t r a v e l , much l i k e t h e i r t r a d i t i o n a l o r p a s t l i f e s t y l e d i d . The stone most o f t e n used i s commonly c a l l e d soapstone and i s v e r y s o f t . I t s c o l o u r can be g r e y , green or b l a c k . The green stone i s o f t e n c a l l e d s e r p e n t i n e , w h i l e o t h e r s t o n e s are r e f e r r e d t o by t h e i r c o l o u r ( i . e . grey s t o n e ) . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #21 (Bear on Rock) The stone i s u s u a l l y found i n chunks. The s i z e and shape o f a chunk w i l l a f f e c t t h e way a c a r v i n g e v o l v e s . Do you remember what we s a i d about the s p i r i t of the a n i m a l r e s t i n g i n a stone w a i t i n g f o r the s c u l p t o r t o r e l e a s e i t s shape? That i d e a i s s t i l l h e l d . The I n u i t p l a c e g r e a t v a l u e on how w e l l the c a r v e r h a n d l e s the p a r t i c u l a r s t o n e he hopes t o c a r v e . T h i s bear i s s n o o z i n g on t h e r o c k he has emerged from! N o t i c e how d i f f e r e n t the sto n e l o o k s when i t i s n i c e l y p o l i s h e d l i k e t h e b e a r ? The bottom p a r t has been l e f t as i t was found. NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #22 (Female s c u l p t o r p r e p a r i n g stone) Contemporary s c u l p t o r s o f t e n choose s m a l l s t o n e s as the h u n t e r s d i d i n the o l d t i m e s . They produce s c u l p t u r e s t h a t f i t e a s i l y i n t o the hand o r are even s m a l l e r . These s c u l p t u r e s are not o n l y r e m i n i s c e n t o f t h e t i n y s c u l p t u r e s t h a t were c a r r i e d about b e f o r e , b u t a re a s i z e t h a t i s p o p u l a r w i t h b u y e r s i n the s o u t h . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #23 (Male s c u l p t o r w i t h l a r g e stone) R e c e n t l y , s c u l p t o r s have begun t o work w i t h q u i t e l a r g e s t o n e s l i k e t h i s . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #24 ( S c u l p t i n g w i t h power t o o l s ) White man's axes and s t r o n g m e t a l k n i v e s , as w e l l as power t o o l s , have a l l o w e d t h e c a r v e r s t o e x p e r i m e n t more w i t h the s t o n e . They can c a r v e away p i e c e s much more q u i c k l y than w i t h the o l d hand t o o l s , making i t p o s s i b l e t o car v e l a r g e s c u l p t u r e s . I t t a k e s g r e a t s k i l l and c o n f i d e n c e t o use t h e s e t o o l s on such d e l i c a t e s t o n e . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #25 (Box of s c u l p t u r e m a t e r i a l s ) The I n u i t c a r v e r s s t i l l e n j o y w o r k i n g w i t h t r a d i t i o n a l m a t e r i a l s . They s e a r c h f o r o l d , hardened bones of whales and a n i m a l s . 164 NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #26 (Iy a k a k , s c u l p t u r e i n whalebone, v e r t e b r a e , 1 2 " ) . Can you t e l l what p a r t o f a whale t h e s e bones came from? (the back - v e r t e b r a e ) . I y a k a k , the s c u l p t o r o f t h i s p i e c e , has used t h e n a t u r a l shape o f the bones as a p a r t o f the d e s i g n . Whether c a r v i n g i n s t o n e , bone o r i v o r y , the I n u i t show a g r e a t s e n s i t i v i t y f o r the o r i g i n a l shape o f t h e m a t e r i a l they use. NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #27 ( B i r d s , c a r i b o u a n t l e r ) These b i r d s have been made from c a r i b o u a n t l e r s . They have been c a r e f u l l y p o l i s h e d f o r a smooth, s h i n y s u r f a c e . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #28 (Marc T u n g i l i k , i n l a y s c u l p t u r e ) . Some s c u l p t o r s e x p e r i m e n t w i t h u s i n g more than one m a t e r i a l . T h i s p i e c e combines soapstone and i v o r y . The i v o r y i s s e t i n t o the soapst o n e ; t h i s i s c a l l e d i n l a y . Most a r t i s t s i n the s o u t h where we l i v e , t h i n k a g r e a t d e a l about t h e i d e a s b e h i n d t h e i r work - why they choose a s u b j e c t , how t o show t h e s u b j e c t , what m a t e r i a l s a re most s u i t a b l e f o r t h e i d e a , and how the work r e l a t e s t o o t h e r work or i d e a s . The I n u i t s c u l p t o r , however, i s not concerned w i t h such t h o u g h t s . He i s m a i n l y c o n c e r n e d t h a t t h e s c u l p t u r e has a l l o f the n e c e s s a r y p a r t s (arms, l e g s e t c . ) and t h a t i t l o o k s l i k e the s u b j e c t - whether i t i s an a n i m a l , a p e r s o n o r an i m a g i n a r y c r e a t u r e . 1 6 5 S l i d e # 28 ( c o n t i n u e d ) The I n u i t s c u l p t o r b e l i e v e s t h a t i f he has done h i s s c u l p t u r e w e l l i t s h o u l d need no f u r t h e r e x p l a n a - t i o n s . Some o f the younger s c u l p t o r s who have had the o p p o r t u n i t y t o r e a d about o t h e r s c u l p t o r s from o t h e r c u l t u r e s o r t o s t u d y a r t a t c o l l e g e s or u n i - v e r s i t i e s , no l o n g e r t h i n k t h i s way e n t i r e l y . They f e e l more freedom t o e x p e r i m e n t w i t h the i d e a s o f o t h e r s and combine them w i t h the t r a d i t i o n s o f t h e I n u i t c u l t u r e . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #29 ( N i v i a k s h i a k , Sea Goddess R i d i n g a S e a l , 1958) Sedna, the Sea Goddess, i s a c h a r a c t e r from l e g e n d who i s s t i l l a p o p u l a r s u b j e c t o f I n u i t a r t . You w i l l h e a r h e r l e g e n d l a t e r , b u t , b r i e f l y : she i s the Goddess who has complete c o n t r o l o ver sea and l a n d a n i m a l s , and t h u s , t h e I n u i t ' s f o o d . I t i s b e l i e v e d t h a t she i s v e r y calm when her h a i r i s n e a t , as i n t h i s s c u l p t u r e , b u t . . . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #30 (Ashoona, Enraged T a y l a y o , 1962, green stone) .... angry and v i o l e n t when he r h a i r becomes a mess. Does t h i s sound l i k e anyone you know?!!! N o t i c e how t h i s newer s c u l p t u r e has many more h o l e s and spaces than the l a s t one. 166 NEXT SLIDE: Slide #31 (Jobie Crow, Sea S p i r i t Transformation, 1980 green-grey stone, 70 X lOOmm) In many Inuit legends, humans turn into sea creatures and vice versa. This i s c a l l e d a transformation. That i s what i s happening i n t h i s sculpture. Can you guess how big this sculpture is?...(pause)... i t i s actually small enough to carry i n the palm of your hand. It i s c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of Inuit sculpture that such a small work can be made to give the impression of something big, s o l i d and massive. Can you guess what shape the o r i g i n a l stone might have been?..(pause) NEXT SLIDE: Slide #32 (minimal dancing bear) Can you guess what the subject of t h i s sculpture i s ? . . . It's a very happy bear. Many Inuit sculptors today experiment with making their pieces as simple but expressive as possible, creating t r u l y elegant works of art. NEXT SLIDE: Slide #33 (Iola, Bear, 1966, 22 in.) This bear i s carved i n much more d e t a i l and i s more t r a d i t i o n a l , but just as joyous! NEXT SLIDE: Slide #34 (Manno, Bear on Ice, 1964, 3%X6 7/10X3 3/10 in.) Can you guess what the subject of t h i s one i s ? . . . I t i s very small - just 3" X 6". The delicate legs and t h e i r " r e f l e c t i o n s " must have been very d i f f i c u l t to carve. The a r t i s t had to use very fine d r i l l s . 167 NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #35 ( E l i S a l l u a l u k , s c u l p t u r e ) New s c u l p t u r e s show e x p e r i m e n t s w i t h new s u b j e c t s . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #36 ( K i a k s h u k , Morning Sun, 1961, s t e n c i l ) Now l e t us look a t a n o t h e r a r t form t h a t the I n u i t have become w e l l known f o r - t h e p r i n t . Many of the I n u i t had e x p r e s s e d c u r i o s i t y about how the packages o f t h e new p r o d u c t s they were u s i n g c o u l d be made ex- a c t l y t h e same each t i m e . (Think o f t h e l a b e l on a soup c a n ) . Houston showed them how a s t e n c i l c o u l d be used t o make many c o p i e s o f t h e one d e s i g n over and over a g a i n . When a copy i s made on paper, i t i s c a l l e d a p r i n t . NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #37 ( P i t s e o l a k , A Drawing Out o f My Mind, 1967) P r i n t s and drawings are now a p o p u l a r a r t form o f t h e I n u i t , a l t h o u g h they were not p a r t o f t h e I n u i t t r a d i t i o n . "Two w i n t e r s - two y e a r s - a f t e r J i m came t o l i v e i n Cape D o r s e t , he began t o ask f o r drawings. Many p e o p l e had been d o i n g the drawings b e f o r e I s t a r t e d . I t was o n l y j u s t b e f o r e J i m went away t h a t I h e a r d p e o p l e were drawing t o make money." P i t s e o l a k e n j o y e d p r o d u c i n g c o l o u r f u l c l o t h e s f o r . Houston t o s e l l i n the s o u t h , b u t when she d i s c o v e r e d t h a t more money c o u l d be made from j u s t drawing on paper, she was amazed. 168 S l i d e #37 (c o n t i n u e d ) Many o f P i t s e o l a k ' s drawings l o o k e d l i k e m o n s t e r s , a l t h o u g h she s a i d they s t a r t e d out t o be a n i m a l s , but she wasn't a good enough a r t i s t y e t ! We a l l know t h a t problem! The I n u i t drawings were becoming v e r y p o p u l a r i n the sou t h - t h e r e were b a r e l y enough b e i n g done t o s u p p l y a l l o f the o r d e r s f o r them. One day a w h i t e p e r s o n was v i s i t i n g an I n u i t f a m i l y where the woman had j u s t f i n i s h e d c u t t i n g some shapes out o f s e a l s k i n t o s t i t c h onto a p a r k a . The p i e c e o f s e a l s k i n from which the shapes had been c u t reminded him o f a s t e n c i l . How may o f you have used a s t e n c i l t o make a l e t t e r f o r the t i t l e on a p r o j e c t o r f o r a s i g n ? At f i r s t t he " p r i n t m a k e r s " made s t e n c i l s u s i n g the d e s i g n s from drawings. The s t e n c i l s were c u t from s e a l s k i n j u s t as I n u i t women had been d o i n g f o r y e a r s t o d e c o r a t e c l o t h i n g . L a t e r they used heavy paper t h a t had been o i l e d t o make s t e n c i l s . The s t e n c i l was l a i d on the paper and i n k was brushed i n t o t h e h o l e u s i n g a b r u s h made o f s t i f f c a r i b o u h a i r o r a wad of c a r i b o u s k i n . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Why do you suppose t h a t the drawings the I n u i t d i d were easy t o adapt t o s t e n c i l work? ( l a r g e , s i m p l e shapes, s o l i d c o l o u r ) 169 S l i d e #37 ( c o n t i n u e d ) B e f o r e c o n t a c t w i t h p e o p l e from the s o u t h , the I n u i t d i d n o t have paper o r p e n c i l s and drawing was al m o s t unheard o f . The o n l y drawings were d e s i g n s s c r a t c h e d on s c u l p t u r e s o r some t h a t were done f o r e a r l y t r a d e r s and w h a l e r s who a l s o s u p p l i e d the m a t e r i a l . When Houston b r o u g h t paper and f e l t pens t o t h e I n u i t , t hey began t o draw p i c t u r e s o f t r a d i t i o n a l l i f e , a n i m a l s and s p i r i t s . He found t h a t they were v e r y p o p u l a r i n the s o u t h . I n i t i a l l y , P i t s e o l a k bought h e r own paper b u t when Houston saw h e r f i r s t drawings and l i k e d them, he gave h e r more m a t e r i a l s . The I n u i t a r t i s t s drew p i c t u r e s o f what they knew. Houston and o t h e r s from t h e s o u t h o f f e r e d s u g g e s t i o n s about what might make the drawings more a t t r a c t i v e f o r s o u t h e r n b u y e r s . For i n s t a n c e , he s u g g e s t e d t h a t t h e y p u t f a c e s on a l l o f t h e c r e a t u r e s and p e o p l e . P i t s e o l a k d i d most o f he r e a r l y drawings i n brown and b l a c k because these were c o l o u r s she knew and l i k e d . I n the p a s t , a l l c l o t h i n g , t o o l s , t e n t s and b o a t s were t h e s e c o l o u r s , because they were made from f u r s and s k i n s . Most o f the a n i m a l s and b i r d s i n t h e A r c t i c a re those c o l o u r s . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Houston s u g g e s t e d she use b r i g h t c o l o u r s i n s t e a d . Why do you suppose t h a t might be? ( c h e e r f u l , c h i l d - l i k e , more a p p e a l i n g t o p e o p l e i n the s o u t h - b r i g h t c o l o u r s t o hang on w a l l s ) . 1 7 0 NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #38 ( K i a k s h u k , Sea Goddess H e l d by a B i r d , s t e n c i l ) K i a k s h u k was the a r t i s t who d i d the drawing f o r t h i s p r i n t . P i t s e o l a k says t h a t he was a v e r y o l d man when she s t a r t e d drawing i n 1951 and she l i k e d h i s drawings because t h e y were " r e a l I n u i t . " He drew p i c t u r e s o f the o l d ways o f l i f e , s p i r i t s and a n i m a l s , from s t o r i e s he had h e a r d o r been t o l d by the shaman. T h i s p r i n t by K i a k s h u k i l l u s t r a t e s t h e p o p u l a r I n u i t l e g e n d of Sedna. What I want you t o n o t i c e i s what i s up i n t h e t o p l e f t hand c o r n e r o f t h e p r i n t . T h i s i s t h e a r t i s t ' s way o f s i g n i n g h i s work. Each a r t i s t had c a r v e d a l i t t l e s t o n e stamp w i t h h i s name done i n an a l p h a b e t c a l l e d " s y l l a b i c . " These l e t t e r s were d e v e l o p e d by m i s s i o n a r i e s i n the l a t e r 1800's so t h a t the I n u i t language c o u l d be w r i t t e n . U n t i l then i t was o n l y spoken. The l e t t e r s a r e based on sounds. The I n u i t l e a r n e d t o use i t v e r y q u i c k l y . Long b e f o r e t h e r e were s c h o o l s i n the A r c t i c , 9 out o f 10 I n u i t c o u l d r e a d and w r i t e t h e i r own language. NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #39 (Geese and Shaman, s t e n c i l ) INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION:Use the f o l l o w i n g as an o u t l i n e f o r d i s c u s s i o n o f t h i s p r i n t . I don't know the t i t l e o f t h i s s t e n c i l , b u t l e t ' s see i f we can f i g u r e o u t what's happening.' What a n i m a l do you see? How can you t e l l what each i s ? Who i s t h e person? Why i s he s i t t i n g ? What are t h e a n i m a l s d o i n g ? .... One t h i n g t o n o t i c e about t h i s p r i n t i s 1 7 1 S l i d e #39 (continued) D i s c u s s i o n : the way the walruses are shaded so t h a t t h e i r tummies are l i g h t e r i n c o l o u r . Why do you suppose t h i s i s ? ( r e a l l y are l i g h t e r ? or h a l f under water?) With a s t e n c i l you can c o n t r o l how l i g h t or dark the ink i s because you rub the ink d i r e c t l y onto the paper. You w i l l see t h a t t h i s i s not so with other p r i n t methods. NEXT SLIDE: S l i d e #40 ( P l a y i n g K i c k b a l l with Demons, stonecut) The b e s t known p r i n t making method used by the I n u i t today i s what we c a l l a stone c u t . T h i s p r i n t c a l l e d " P l a y i n g K i c k b a l l with Demons" was done t h a t way. As we a l r e a d y know, the I n u i t were very s k i l l e d stone c a r v e r s . The stone cut p r i n t method deal s w i t h t a k i n g a drawn design, t r a n s f e r r i n g i t to a f l a t stone s u r f a c e and then c a r v i n g the design out of the stone. Have you ever made a potato p r i n t ? W e l l , imagine the pota t o t o be a b i g s l a b o f green stone. The I n u i t had used t h i s stone f o r c a r v i n g but they found they wasted a l o t when they q u a r r i e d i t because i t tended to break away i n sheets i n s t e a d of the bl o c k s you need f o r s c u l p t u r e . How does a pot a t o p r i n t work? .... That's r i g h t , you carve away the p a r t s of the potato t h a t are not your d e s i g n so t h a t when you are f i n i s h e d c a r v i n g , the p a r t where you drew your design i s h i g h e r than the r e s t ! Stone cut works the same way! When the c a r v i n g i s a l l done, some d e t a i l s can be s c r a t c h e d i n t o the 1 7 2 Slide #40 (continued) design. Then the raised part.of the stone i s covered i n ink by a r o l l e r and the paper i s l a i d down or cut and pressed so that the inked design i s transferred to the paper. Then the paper i s pulled o f f , revealing the design. Let's look at t h i s series of s l i d e s showing how a stone cut i s done: Slides: #41 ... the Inuit a r t i s t preparing a drawing i n his home. What i s he using? #42 ... another a r t i s t at work. Can you guess what season t h i s i s ? Look at the house walls for a clue! #43 ... at the workshop, these printers prepare the stone. They have drawn on the design and are now carving away the background! #44 ... a closer look. The stone has been inked so the printmaker can better see the design he i s carving. #45 ... now the stone i s ready for p r i n t i n g . Can you guess how big and how heavy the stone is? Notice how f i n e l y carved the surface i s ! #46 ... for t h i s p r i n t , the central part of the design i s to be orange, so here the pri n t e r r o l l s on the orange ink with a rubber r o l l e r we c a l l a brayer. #47 ... the paper i s layed on the inked stone and & #48 i t i s rubbed to make sure a l l of the ink transfers to the paper. This i s c a l l e d "burnishing." 1 7 3 Slides:(continued) #49 ... the paper i s pulled o f f the stone and there i s a print.* This p r i n t i s a d i f f e r e n t one than the one we saw before. Can you guess who drew the o r i g i n a l drawing for this one? That's right - Pitseolak. The d i f f e r e n t centres i n the A r c t i c - Cape Dorset, Baker Lake and Povungnituk set up p r i n t making shops i n d i f f e r e n t ways. Most of the pri n t s we are looking at were made at Cape Dorset. In Cape Dorset, the person who carved the stone plates was not usually the a r t i s t who drew the o r i g i n a l drawing. The c r a f t development o f f i c e r s for the south helped the printers at the shop set up a system of preparing and p r i n t i n g the plates and the printers became very s k i l l f u l . The printers worked with the o r i g i n a l a r t i s t s to help decide the best way to do the p r i n t , what colours to use and what changes should be made. At other centres, the a r t i s t s cut t h e i r own p r i n t i n g stones. The Inuit enjoyed the p r i n t workshops because there were enough people working i n one place to provide good conversation while they worked. The work i n the p r i n t shop tended to be seasonal because the men who trained as printers s t i l l wanted to go out for the hunt. This worked out well because during the winter hunting season, the p r i n t i n g inks became too cold and s t i f f to use properly. Some a r t i s t s were also hunters and they could continue drawing while at hunting camp. Other a r t i s t s who did not hunt could continue drawing while the printers were away so that the printers had work ready for them when they returned. 17k Let's look at some prints of Cape Dorset: INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Questions to discuss while looking at prints: Slide #50 #51 #52 - Kikavik and the Man K i l l i n g Seal Return of the Sun #5.3 - #54 - #55 #56 #57 #58 Hunter Luag, Three Owls, Four Birds Muskox Caribou Dream Inukshoo Hunting Why i s there no background? (not thought to be important; used to seeing f l a t land i n which almost everything i s white, making i t d i f f i c u l t to see horizon) What kind of colours are used? Why? How do the a r t i s t s arrange t h e i r figures on the page? i . e . r i g h t i n the middle? The same amount of objects on l e f t and rig h t of center? What kind of movement i s there i s the compo- sit i o n s ? i . e . c i r c u l a r , s t a t i c , radiating. How i s this shown? i . e . d i r e c t i o n figures face, curve of the bodies? What are these prints about? i . e . animals, the hunt, legends. NEXT SLIDE: Slide #59 (Oonark, A Shaman's Helping S p i r i t s ) INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: This i s a Baker Lake p r i n t . How i s i t d i f f e r e n t from Cape Dorset? (more colours, not as much move- ment, i . e . more s t a t i c ) . Today the sculpture and p r i n t workshops are not run by the government cr a f t s director, but by committees of Inuit with the help of the c r a f t s d i r e c t o r . 1 7 5 Slide #59 (continued) These committees are c a l l e d 'cooperatives' and are r e a l l y a business run by the Inuit for the Inuit. The Inuit have become used to the goods and services provided by the settlements (food, clothing, houses, e l e c t r i c i t y , etc.) and t h e i r children now attend schools regularly. But to l i v e i n a settlement means the Inuit must f i n d a way to earn money to buy these goods and services. Arts and c r a f t s co-ops have provided them with money for t h i s new way of l i f e . Running the co-ops themselves gives the Inuit control over the work they do - they are not just working for someone else! Making artworks also gives the Inuit the chance to communicate to others t h e i r feelings about th e i r l i f e , legends and t r a d i t i o n s . Pictures and sculptures are a language understood by a l l , no matter what language they speak! This i s what Pitseolak has to say about her a r t : "To make prints i s not easy. You must think f i r s t and t h i s i s hard to do. But I am happy doing the p r i n t s . After my husband died, I f e l t alone and unwanted: making prints i s what has made me happiest since he died. I am going to keep on doing them u n t i l they t e l l me to stop. If no one t e l l s me to stop, I s h a l l make them as long as I am well. I f I can, I ' l l make them even after I am dead." 1 7 6 INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP STUDIO ACTIVITY: The studio a c t i v i t y for t h i s workshop w i l l be a printmaking project using the ledgend of Sedna as a motivation for imagery. Steps: 1. Begin by reading the c h i l d r e n the story of Sedna, t e l l i n g them to l i s t e n for a part that they would l i k e to i l l u s t r a t e . 2. Have the c h i l d r e n do a quick sketch of their idea, reminding them of Inuit p r i n t c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s such as, 1) no background, 2) no horizon l i n e , 3) simple shapes, 4) c i r u c l a r or r a d i a l comp- o s i t i o n . ' 3 . Demonstrate the p r i n t technique using foam sheets for the primary grade childre n and l i n o for the intermediate grade children. With the classes using the l i n o tools, emphasize safety and promise to take away the tools i f they are not used properly, 4. Help students produce t h e i r p r i n t s . Have them do an e d i t i o n of two p r i n t s so that they can take one with them and leave the other at the g a l l e r y . 177 INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP SUPPLIES L I S T : 1) p e n c i l s 2) scrap paper 3) p r i n t i n g paper 4) i n k s - black and pr i m a r i e s 5) r o l l e r s 6) b r u s h e s 7) l i n o 8) l i n o c u t t e r s 9) foam sheeting 10) s c i s s o r s 12) i n k i n g surface i e . ) g l a s s sheet or a r b o r i t e 13) wooden spoons Sedna, the Sea Goddess The Petrels, proud birds that they are, l i v e on the highest parts of the c l i f f s . From their peaks they s w i r l out l i k e snowflakes, looking down on the r o l l i n g noisiness of Razor B i l l s who bu i l d their nests halfway up, and the Gulls and the l i t t l e Kittiwakes, who are content to nest at the bottom. Once, long, long ago, there was a Petrel who was so proud that he could f i n d no mate that pleased him among his own kind, so he decided that he would marry a Human being. With a l i t t l e magic, the Pet r e l gave himself a human form. Then, wanting to look his best, he got some f i n e seal skins and made a be a u t i f u l parka. Now he looked very handsome, but his eyes were s t i l l the eyes of a b i r d , so he made some 179 spectacles from thin pieces of walrus tusk. These spectacles had only narrow s l i t s to look through, and hid the Petrel's eyes completely. In t h i s disguise, he went out i n his kayak to f i n d a wife. In a skin-covered tent beside the sea there l i v e d a beau t i f u l g i r l named Sedna, who had many brothers but no s i s t e r s , and her father was a widower. Many men had come to her to ask her to marry them—men from her own t r i b e and other t r i b e s — b u t Sedna re- fused to marry. She was as proud i n her way as the Petrel, and could f i n d no man who pleased her. The the Petrel came, appearing as a handsome stranger i n a b e a u t i f u l sealskin parka. Instead of bringing i his kayak up onto the beach, he stayed i n i t at the edge of the surf and ca l l e d out to Sedna to come to him. This interested Sedna, as no other suitor had done such a thing, but she would not go to him. Then he began to sing to her: "Come to me, Come into the land of the birds Where there i s never hunger, Where my tent i s made of be a u t i f u l skins. You w i l l have a necklace of ivory And sleep on the skins of bears. Your lamps w i l l be always f i l l e d with o i l And your pot with meat." - 3 - 181 The song was so b e a u t i f u l that Sedna could not re- fuse. She packed her belongings i n a sealskin bag; she stepped out of the tent and she walked down across the beach and got into the stranger's kayak. They s a i l e d out over the sea, away from Sedna's home and her father and brothers. The Petrel made a home for Sedna on the rocky c l i f f . Every day he caught f i s h for her, t e l l i n g her that they were young seals, and f o r a while Sedna was hap- py, because the P e t r e l had enchanted her. But one day the Petrel's spectacles f e l l o f f , and f o r the f i r s t time Sedna looked into her husband's eyes. In that moment the s p e l l was broken. She r e a l i z e d a l l at once that she was married to a, b i r d , and she saw that her home was a nest on a barren c l i f f . For the f i r s t time she f e l t the sting of the sea spray and the lash- ing winds. Sedna wept with g r i e f and despair, and the Pet r e l , although he loved her, could not console her. In the meantime, Sedna's father and brothers had grown more and more lonely, with no woman to cook their meat and sew their clothing and keep the o i l burning i n th e i r lamps. They set out i n th e i r boat i n the d i r e c t i o n that the stranger had taken Sedna. - 4 - 182 When they came to the c l i f f where Sena l i v e d , the Pe t r e l was away hunting, and Sedna was alone. When she saw her family, she went running down to them, weeping, and i n a rush t o l d them a l l that had hap- pened to her. Her brothers immediately l i f t e d her into the boat and they bagan paddling as rapi d l y as possible back toward th e i r own coast. They had not been gone long when the Petrel returned to the nest. He looked everywhere for Sedna, and he c a l l e d for her, his cry a long and lonely sound that was l o s t i n the wind and the sound of the sea. Other Petrels answered him; they t o l d him where Sedna had gone. Spreading his wings, he soared out over the sea and was soon f l y i n g over the boat that was carrying Sedna back to her home. This made the brothers nervous, and they paddled f a s t e r . As they skimmed over the water, the P e t r e l became angry. He began to beat his wings against the wind, making i t whirl and shriek, and making the waves leap higher and higher. In minutes the sea was black with storm, and the waves so wild that the boat was i n danger of turning over. Then Sedna's brothers and father r e a l i z e d that the P e t r e l was angry because his bride was being taken from him. They decide that they must s a c r i f i c e Sedna to the sea i n order to save th e i r own l i v e s . They picked her up and threw her into the i c y water. - 5 - 183 Sedna, blue with cold, came up to the surface and grabbed at the side of the boat with fingers that were turning to i c e . Her brothers, out of th e i r mids with fear, h i t at her hands with a paddle, and her f i n g e r - tips broke off l i k e i c i c l e s and f e l l back into the sea, where they turned into seals and swam away. Coming up again, Sedna t r i e d once more to catch hold of the boat, and again her brothers h i t at her hands with the paddle. The second j o i n t s of her fingers, breaking off and f a l l i n g into the water, turned into ojuk, ground seals. Two more times Sedna attempted to take hold of the side of the boat, and each time her t e r r i f i e d brothers h i t her hands, ana the t h i r d j o i n t s of her fingers turned into walrus and the thumbs became whales. Then Sedna sank to the bottom of the sea. The storm died down, and the brothers f i n a l l y brought their boat to land,but a great wave followed them and drowned a l l of them. - 6 - 1 8 3 a Sedna became a powerful s p i r i t , i n c o n t r o l of the sea c r e a t u r e s who sprang from her f i n g e r s . Sometimes she sends storms and wrecks kayaks. The people f e a r her, and h o l d ceremonies i n her honor, and on e s p e c i a l l y s e r i o u s o c c a s i o n s — a s when she causes famines by keep- ing the s e a l s from being caught by the hunters--the angakok, or c o n j u r e r , goes on a s p i r i t journey to Sedna's home a t the bottom of the sea, to arrange her h a i r . Sedna wears her h a i r i n two b r a i d s , each as t h i c k as an arm , but s i n c e she has no f i n g e r s , she cannot p l a i t her own h a i r , and t h i s i s the s e r v i c e she a p p r e c i a t e s most of a l l . So when the angakok comes to her and a r - ranges her h a i r f o r her, she i s so g r a t e f u l t h a t she sends some of the s e a l s and other animals to the hunters so they may have food. from: C a s w e l l , H., Shadows From The S i n g i n g House H u r t i g P u b l i s h e r s , Edmonton, 1973. - 7 - 184 INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP SLIDE LIST: P i t s e o l a k , Happy G i r l s , 1967, f e l t pen draw i n g . P i t s e o l a k , Both i n Summer and i n W i n t e r We Moved a L o t , 1970 f e l t pen dr a w i n g . I n u i t w e a r i n g o l d s t y l e f u r c l o t h i n g . Amautiuk O l d B e r i n g Sea implements. Snow g o g g l e s . M i n i a t u r e a n i m a l s c u l p t u r e s . Pre-WW I I c a r v i n g s from t h e I g l o o l i k a r e a , G. Rowley, photo. Thule p e r i o d , B i r d F i g u r e s , i v o r y , 1^ X 2, i n . Inukchuk. Masks. Top: D o r s e t c u l t u r e , A d v e r d j a r , 8 i n . Bottom: D o r s e t c u l t u r e , c. 1000 A.D., c a r i b o u a n t l e r , 4% i n . Female d o l l , pre-1900, i v o r y . P i p e s , 10 X 12 i n . Thule c u l t u r e , Marrow P i c k , i v o r y , 1.9 X 20.4 x 27 cm. Unknown, Hu n t e r , pre-19 00, i v o r y . P a r k a . Manguagsualuk, w a l l h a n g i n g . Angnaqqaq, w a l l h a n g i n g . Rocks. Bear on Rock, s c u l p t u r e , s o a p s t o n e . Woman s c u l p t o r p r e p a r i n g s t o n e . Working on the s t o n e . U s i n g modern t o o l s Box o f s c u l p t u r e m a t e r i a l s . 185 SLIDE L I S T ( c o n t i n u e d #2) 26) I y a k a k , s c u l p t u r e o f whal e bone v e r t e b r a e , 12 i n . h i g h . 27) Unknown, B i r d s , c a r i b o u a n t l e r , D. S u t h e r l a n d , p h o t o . 28) T u n g i l i k , i n l a y s c u l p t u r e . 29) N i v i a k s h i a k , S e a Goddess R i d i n g a S e a l , 1958 30) A s h o o n a , E n r a g e d T a y l a y o , 196 2, g r e e n s t o n e . 31) J o b i e Crow, Sea S p i r i t T r a n s f o r m a t i o n , 19 80, g r e e n - g r e y s t o n e g r e e n - g r e y s t o n e , 70 X 45 X 100mm. 32) B e a r . 33) I o l a , B e a r , 1966, 22 i n . 34) Manno, B e a r On I c e , 1964, 3% X 6 7/10 X 3 3/10 i n . 35) E l i S a l l u a l u k , s c u l p t u r e . 36) K i a k s h u k , M o r n i n g Sun, 1961, s t e n c i l 37) P i t s e o l a k , A D r a w i n g Out o f My M i n d , 1967 38) K i a k s h u k , S e a Goddess H e l d By a B i r d , s t e n c i l . 39) Geese and Shaman, s t e n c i l . 40) P l a y i n g K i c k B a l l W i t h Demons. 41) I n u i t a r t i s t d r a w i n g . 42) I n u i t a r t i s t d r a w i n g a t home, I n f o r m a t i o n Canada P h o t o g r a p h . 43) I n u i t p r e p a r i n g s t o n e b l o c k s f o r p r i n t i n g , I n f o r m a t i o n Canada P h o t o . 44) P r e p a r i n g s t o n e b l o c k . 45) P r e p a r i n g b l o c k , I n f o r m a t i o n Canada P h o t o g r a p h . 46) I n k i n g on t h e s e c o n d c o l o u r , I n f o r m a t i o n Canada P h o t o g r a p h 47) L a y i n g a s h e e t o f p a p e r on t h e i n k e d s t o n e , I n f o r m a t i o n Canada P h o t o . 48) B u r n i s h i n g t h e p a p e r on t h e i n k e d s t o n e , I n f o r m a t i o n Canada P h o t o . 49) P u l l i n g a p r i n t . 50) Man K i l l i n g a S e a l , s t o n e c u t . 186 SLIDE LIST ( c o n t i n u e d #3) 51) The R e t u r n o f t h e Sun, stone c u t . 5 2) K i k a v i k and t h e H u n t e r , s t o n e c u t . 53) L u a j , Three Owls, Four B i r d s , s t o n e c u t . 54) Muskox, stone c u t . 55) C a r i b o u . 56) Kenojuak, Dream, s t o n e c u t . 57) Inukshoo. 58) H u n t i n g . 59) Oonark, A Shaman's H e l p i n g S p i r i t s .    190 APPENDIX 7 191 SURREY ART GALLERY: INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP Follow-up ideas Teacher Note: A f t e r your v i s i t to the Surrey A r t G a l l e r y f o r the I n u i t Workshop you might want t o do some follo w - u p a c t i v i t i e s with your c l a s s . F o l l o w i n g are some suggestions: 1) S t e n c i l p r i n t s : I n u i t women used t o decorate c l o t h i n g and i g l o o w a l l s with a p p l i q u e s c u t from s e a l s k i n . These a p p l i q u e s were i n the shapes of animals upon whom the I n u i t depended f o r food, or, of c h a r a c t e r s from I n u i t legends. From these evolved the s t e n c i l p r i n t . A c t i v i t y A - Use an I n u i t legend, or have the students, i n d i v i d u a l l y or as a c l a s s , compose a s t o r y about I n u i t l i f e as a s u b j e c t f o r t h e i r p r o j e c t . Have students c u t animal shapes from squares of b r i s t o l board, s t r e s s i n g the bulk of the form. Arrange the shapes on a sheet of c o n t r a s t i n g c a r d or paper i n a composition which i l l - u s t r a t e s t h e i r s t o r y . A c t i v i t y B - Make a p r i n t w i t h the neg a t i v e shapes t h a t are l e f t i n the card when the a p p l i q u e s are cut out as a s t e n c i l . Make a p r i n t . Lay the shapes over a p i e c e of paper and f i l l i n the hole with p a i n t (brushed or sprayed on) or crayon. Arrange s e v e r a l shapes f o r i n - t e r e s t i n g compositions. You may wish to t r y o v e r l a p p i n g shapes, once the f i r s t p r i n t i n g i s dry. The shaman o f t e n used masks t o a i d them i n the t e l l i n g of s t o r i e s about the s p i r i t s and i n t h e i r s p i r i t - f l i g h t s to communicate with the s p i r i t s . Have the students make up t h e i r own s p i r i t or choose a s p i r i t from an I n u i t legend t o p o r t r a y i n a mask. T h e i r own s p i r i t should have a s p e c i a l s i g n i f i c a n c e to t h e i r own l i f e or t o our contemporary l i f e s t y l e . The masks c o u l d be c o n s t r u c t e d from p a p i e r mache, paper bags or c o l o r e d papers. Emphasize t h a t a mask must i l l - u s t r a t e s p e c i f i c c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of the s p i r i t so t h a t everyone w i l l r e c o g n i z e who i t i s . Attached t o t h i s sheet are some mask making techniques you might want to use. Afterwards the c h i l d r e n c o u l d use t h e i r masks i n a dramatic p r e s e n t a t i o n of the s t o r y . The precedents f o r much I n u i t s c u l p t u r e were game pi e c e s carved from bone, i v o r y , wood or stone. Attached t o t h i s page are d e s c r i p t i o n s of some I n u i t games and toys. Your c l a s s c o u l d make the p i e c e s needed f o r the games out of wood, soap, s t r i n g , p l a s t i c e t c . and then p l a y the games. 2) 3) /2 - 2 - 192 SURREY ART GALLERY: INUIT ARTS AND CULTURE WORKSHOP 4) There are the following films available free through the N.F.B. that might be interesting to show to your cla s s : 1. The Living A r c t i c 56:01 c o l : 106C175-249 2. Polar Bear 27:42 c o l : 106c0176-171 3. Sikusilarmiut 28:54 c o l : 106c0175-078 (made up of excerpts from animated films made in Cape Dorset, interspersed with l i v e action footage of modern day Cape Dorset). 4. Stefanson: The A r c t i c Project 15:56 c o l : 106B0165-121 (The adventures of an A r c t i c geographer as he maps vast stretches of the A r c t i c , t r a v e l l i n g by dog sled). 5. Angotee: The Story of an Eskimo Boy (1953) 31:00 c o l : 106c0153-021 (- growing up i n the 'old days ') 6. Animation From Cape Dorset 18:52 c o l : l06col73-668 7. Legends and L i f e of the Inuit 57:46 c o l : 106c0178-395 8. Yesterday - Today - The N e t s i l i k Eskimo - a series of several films about the t r a d i t i o n a l Inuit and adaptation to modern times. 9.. Eskimo A r t i s t Kenojuak 19:49 c o l : 106c0164-017 (the work and techniques of Inuit woman printmaker Kenojuak). 10. Sonanguagat: Inuit Masterworks 24:51 c o l : 106c0174-525 11. The Stories of Tuktu Series (thirteen films about the l i f e of an Inuit boy - see catalogue for d e t a i l s ) . There are several more films about the Inuit available through N.F.B. and l i s t e d i n their catalogue. 1 9 3 MASK MAKING TECHNIQUES * 1) Make posit i v e mold with clay or p l a s t i c i n e . The finished mold should look l i k e the mask which you want to make. To economize on clay for a large mask, i t i s possible to 'pad' the base of the mold with something, e.g. rolled-up news- paper. 2) Cover the mold completely with th i n layer of vaseline. 3) Make paste: add a l i t t l e water to white f l o u r and s t i r to a smooth, thick consistency, then pour on b o i l i n g water, s t i r r i n g constantly, u n t i l paste thickens. 4) Dip pieces of brown paper i n the paste and cover mold care- f u l l y - t r y to avoid wrinkles. Repeat u n t i l there are four complete layers. To distinguish layers e a s i l y , use d i f f e r e n t coloured bags. Do not use newspaper. Do not wait for each layer to dry before adding next layer. Start with thick paper, end with thin. 5) Allow to dry. 6) Remove mask from mold. In most cases the mask w i l l e a s i l y s l i p off the mold, but with some complicated shapes, parts of the clay mold have to be dug out. 7) Immediately wipe off a l l excess vaseline from mask. 8) Allow mask to dry more thoroughly, but maintain i t s shape, e.g. by putting a piece .of.plastic over the mold and putting the mask back on the mold loosely (so a i r can c i r - culate) . 9) Trim edges to required shape and make any mechanical ad- justments. Strengthen edges with extra layer of papier- mache and wire. (wire re-inforcement i s optional) 10) Allow edges to dry, then sandpaper to make surface of mask smooth. 11) Paint mask inside and out with a layer of white glue. (If you are planning to paint the mask with water-colours, only paint glue on the inside of the mask.) 12) Allow glue to dry, then attach e l a s t i c to the inside of the mask with white glue and a small s t r i p of thin card. 13) Paint mask and add trimmings - hair, fur, f a b r i c or whatever. 14) Cut eye-holes and breath-holes. Eye-holes can be cut any- where, preferably i n a part of the mask painted with a dark colour. 15) If necessary, pad mask with foam for comfort. 16) Wear mask. 17) Re-cycle clay: wipe off vaseline and put clay i n a p l a s t i c bag with a wet sponge, If clay i s very hard, soak i t . 18) When clay i s usable, MAKE ANOTHER MASK. * Courtesy of Garbanzo the clown 194 GAMES AND TOYS Games: H i d e and s e e k , s l i d i n g and s k i p p i n g were p o p u l a r among c h i l d r e n . T h e s e games a r e u n i v e r s a l . B u t t h e m a j o r i t y o f c h i l d r e n s ' games were a p r e p a r a t i o n f o r t h e i r a d u l t l i f e . The games n o t o n l y p r o v i d e d e n j o y m e n t b u t h e l p e d t h e I n u i t c h i l d r e n d e v e l o p t h e s t r e n g t h and t e n a c i t y n e c e s s a r y f o r s u r v i v a l . AJEGAUNG - s i m i l a r t o b a l l and c u p . A s m a l l i v o r y a n i m a l o r s k u l l c a r v e d w i t h many h o l e s i s t o s s e d i n t o t h e a i r and c a u g h t on a p o i n t e d s t i c k o r bone a t t a c h e d by a l e a t h e r t h o n g . H o l e s must be s p e a r e d i n a s p e c i f i c o r d e r and m i s s i n g means m i s s i n g a t u r n . S t u d e n t s c a n make t h e i r own by c a r v i n g soap o r p l a s t e r i n t o s h a p e s and u s i n g s t i c k s and s t r i n g . Take a p i e c e o f soap o r p l a s t e r and c a r v e a s m a l l d e s i g n i n i t . N e x t d r i l l a s many h o l e s a s you l i k e b u t be s u r e t h a t t h e s t i c k y ou u s e w i l l f i t i n t o t h e h o l e s . Now mark t h e h o l e s w i t h a number u n t i l a l l t h e h o l e s have a d i f f e r e n t number. S e c u r e l y g l u e a p i e c e o f s t r i n g t o t h e soap. A t t a c h t h e s t r i n g t o a s t i c k t h a t h a s a d u l l p o i n t a t one end. Now you a r e r e a d y t o p l a y . TINGMIUJANG - s i m i l a r t o d i c e . S m a l l i v o r y images o f b i r d s and s e a t e d men a r e t o s s e d i n t h e a i r one a t a t i m e . The f i g u r e s t h a t l a n d u p r i g h t b e l o n g t o t h e p l a y e r t h e y f a c e . The one who c o l l e c t s t h e most f i g u r e s i s t h e w i n n e r . Any number o f s t u d e n t s c a n p l a y . Make y o u own d i c e p i e c e s by c o l l e c t i n g p i e c e s o f bone and s c r a t c h i n g o r m a r k i n g a d e s i g n on one s i d e t o i n d i c a t e t h e t o p f a c e . Use i n k t o make t h e d e s i g n s t a n d o u t . Now s i t t i n g i n a c i r c l e , e a c h s t u d e n t t a k e s t u r n s t hrow- i n g t h e i r d i c e i n t h e a i r . When t h e d i c e l a n d , e a c h p l a y e r c o l l e c t s t h e p i e c e s f a c i n g him. - 2 - 195 Toys: R a t t l e s were made from bear t e e t h w i t h h o l e s d r i l l e d i n them and a t t a c h e d t o a ha n d l e . Wooden tops were round w i t h a s t i c k d r i l l e d and g l u e d i n th e c e n t e r . The tops were d e c o r a t e d w i t h d e s i g n s . To make the tops s p i n , c h i l d r e n would t w i s t the s t i c k between t h e i r f i n g e r s w i t h the end of the s t i c k b a l a n c e d on the ground. W h i z z e r s a r e m u s i c a l t o y s . They a r e wooden t o y s shaped l i k e a p r o p e l l e r w i t h one end a t t a c h e d t o a s t r i n g . When p u l l e d t h r o u g h t h e a i r they made a b u z z i n g sound. B u l l R o a r e r s a r e made of wooden s l a t s l i k e l e a v e s , w h i c h w h i r l t h r o u g h the a i r a t the end o f an a t t a c h e d thong l i k e a whip l a s h , making a fearsome n o i s e . 1 9 6 APPENDIX 8 197 SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART ""TnTZS SURREY ART GALLERY 596-7461 SURREY ART GALLERY SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT SURREY ART GALLERY 13750 - 88th Avenue S u r r e y , B.C. V3W 3L1 (604) 596-7461 199 SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART PREPARATORY KIT CONTENTS 1. Teacher Introduction Sheet 2. 1 Sleeve of Slides 3. 1 Cassette Tape of Slide Commentary 4. S c r i p t for Slide Commentary 5. L i s t of Slides included i n K i t 6. Student A c t i v i t y Sheet 7. Teacher Copy of A c t i v i t y Sheet (with answers) 8. Follow-up Ideas 200 SURREY ART GALLERY: SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART WORKSHOP Teacher Introduction: We are looking forward to your c l a s s v i s i t to the Surrey Art Gallery on _ from 9:45 a.m. to 12 noon, to parti c i p a t e i n the Seeing Ourselves Through Art Workshop, consisting of a guided tour of our current e x h i b i t i o n , a presentation and an art a c t i v i t y . This package of materials has been prepared to be used by you and your class as a background and introduction to the presentation you w i l l have at the Art Gallery. This package includes: 1. A sleeve of 19 sli d e s 2. A s c r i p t for the s l i d e commentary 3. A student a c t i v i t y sheet 4. A teacher answer sheet You w i l l need to round up: 1. A s l i d e projector and screen 2. A map of the world Approximately 45 minutes of class time should be set aside for this presentation. When you v i s i t the g a l l e r y you w i l l be p a r t i c i p a t i n g in a workshop that explores Canadian history by studying paintings by Canadian a r t i s t s whose subjects were people. The materials that you are about to use in your classroom w i l l lead you through a fast survey of the a r t i s t s ' treatment of the figure from e a r l i e s t times u n t i l 19th century France. We are providing this background so that, in your workshop, you w i l l be able to relate our Canadian art history to i t s roots in Europe. How to Use This K i t : 1. The sl i d e s in thi s package are numbered in the order in which they are to be shown. For the commentary to accompany the s l i d e s you can either: a) play the cassette provided; or b) read the commentary aloud to the class yourself from the s c r i p t provided. The tape w i l l indicate when to change s l i d e s by a tone. The s c r i p t also indicates where to change s l i d e s . 2. There are places in the commentary where interruptions for 201 class discussion are appropriate. Just stop the tape and use the questions suggested in the s c r i p t to guide discussion. There are also times when you may want to stop the s l i d e s to point out things you might want your class to note in p a r t i c u l a r . 3. Before you begin the s l i d e presentation, d i s t r i b u t e the a c t i v i t y sheet to the cl a s s , as the a c t i v i t i e s have been planned to take place at indicated times throughout the presentation. Have the class read over the vocabulary l i s t at the beginning of the a c t i v i t y sheet so that they can look for the words during the presentation. The vocabulary words are also underlined in your s c r i p t . 4. A c t i v i t y #3 involves doing a drawing a l a ancient Egypt. You may want your class to use large paper, f e l t , pastels or pencil crayons for this exercise so please bring the drawings to our Gallery when you v i s i t . Kit Return: Please bring the k i t materials back to the Gallery when you come for the Workshop. We also welcome any written comments suggestions you may have regarding the k i t . If you have l o s t a s l i d e , please phone us immediately so we ca make a duplicate. There is a one d o l l a r charge for each l o s t s l i d e , payable in cash upon your v i s i t to the Gallery. We hope that this k i t i s helpful to you and that your class enjoys i t . 202 SLIDE COMMENTARY SCRIPT SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART WORKSHOP PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT Introduct i on: Since the beginning of man's time on earth, he has expressed himself through a r t , whether by decorating his weapons and tools or painting animal scenes in caves to record and help in the hunt for food. In p r e h i s t o r i c times, man's l i f e depended e n t i r e l y upon how well he could use what was on hand, therefore the most important things to him were animals and the tools he needed to hunt them or defend himself against them. According to the few examples archaeologists have found, people did not appear in the e a r l i e s t cave paintings because the purpose of art was to depict the animals man depended on for l i f e , not to t e l l about himself. S l l d e # 1 (Thebes, Ladies and Musicians, tomb painting, c.1400 B.C.) Very gradually man became more organized in his l i v i n g and he invented many things to improve his 1 i f e. He learned how to breed and tend animals for food and transportation. He learned how to plant and harvest crops so that he did not have to search for wild plants for food. 3. He learned to weave c l o t h . He developed building s k i l l s so that he could construct more permanent homes in the•locations he desired. 5. He developed ways of organizing people so that they could l i v e in large settlements more e f f i c i e n t l y . People within these settlements had p a r t i c u l a r jobs to do to help in the functioning of the community. Within this structure some people became very powerful and accumulated great wealth, others found themselves as servants to these people. In ancient Egypt the pharaoh was the most important person. To the people he was a combined king and a god. Because the pharaoh believed that there was a 2 0 3 - 2 - l i f e after death for which he must be prepared, each had his slaves build a huge pyramid to hold his tomb. Inside that tomb were many chambers which housed the food, ut e n s i l s and wealth he would need to use in his next l i f e . He had slave a r t i s t s paint the walls of the tombs with pictures that i l l u s t r a t e d how good his l i f e was, how wealthy he was and how he would pass to his next l i f e . This was done so that the gods could "see" what a great man he was. In this painting from the walls of a tomb at Thebes, done about 1400 B.C., we see some of the ladies and musicians who would have entertained the pharoah and his court. Take a second to try to s i t in your chair in the same position as these people - notice especially which way the shoulders face, the head face and the legs go. (pause) Is t h i s a comfortable position? Look at the s l i d e again - do the people look a l i k e to you? These people are a l l very similar in appearance, - the same si z e , the same posi t i o n , the same features. The a r t i s t used a formula, a pattern that told him what a person looks l i k e . The figures represent people, but do not show them as individuals. Notice how f l a t the figures look and how a l l heads are viewed from the side, a l l eyes from the front shoulders from the front and hips and legs from the side. The a r t i s t s who did these murals did not sign their work because i t was not thought to be important who they were. People thought of a r t i s t s in the same way they did carpenters and builders. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #2 ( C l a s s i c a l Greece, Ruvo, tomb mural, Veiled Women, 4th C., B.C.) One thousand years l a t e r , in Greece, a r t i s t s have learned to watch people more cl o s e l y , to see how they move, how they look, what their proportions are. As a r e s u l t , these people look much more natural and r e a l i s t i c . We don't know who the a r t i s t was who did this work because he was considered a craftsman, l i k e a carpenter, t a i l o r or'goldsmith and therefore did not sign his work. But we can t e l l that he has studied his subject, people, very thoroughly. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #3 (French Tapestry, c.1073-83) Most painters of the past were men because women did not work outside of the home. However, women worked with cl o t h to produce and decorate the family's - 3 - 204 clothing. They also made tapestries; hand woven fa b r i c decorated with s t i t c h i n g , to be used as decorations i n the home and in churches. The women often used subjects similar to those used by painters, such as in t h i s tapestry produced in 1073 nine hundred years agol Often art was produced to t e l l people s t o r i e s about the Bible or important events, because very few people could read. Can you t e l l what story i s being told here? Teacher note: Line of questioning: Which way i s the boat going? How can you t e l l ? Who i s in the boat? Where might they be going? How can you t e l l ? Who are the people on horseback? What are they doing? What are they carrying? Why? Who are the two standing people? What are they doing? How can you t e l l ? Who i s the seated person? How can you t e l l ? Why i s he biggest? What might he be saying? What is the person behind him doing? In f a c t : This i s a part of a very long tapestry that t e l l s the story of the Battle of Hastings, in which William the Conqueror from Europe invaded England and became king. In t h i s section messengers have come to the King of England to t e l l of the defeat. You can notice that the people in this tapestry are quite r e a l i s t i c but in rather awkward poses and look l i k e cutouts. What looks rather odd i s the difference between the size of the people and the tiny buildings. The a r t i s t f e l t the people were more important than buildings, so she made them the biggest. As in the Egyptian and Greek paintings, people are a l l arranged in a row. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #4 (Byzantine, Enthroned Madonna and Child, 1.3 Century) In other parts of the world, a r t i s t s were changing the way they were drawing pictures. This Madonna and Child was painted in the 1200's in Italy by the A d r i a t i c Sea. The face of the Madonna (the V i r g i n Mary) i s very soft and round looking although the features (eyes, nose, mouth) are quite s t y l i z e d . That i s , the a r t i s t only represents each feature, and they would be done in the same way for a l l people regardless of what the pa r t i c u l a r noses, etc., looked l i k e . However, we do have the fe e l i n g that she i s d e f i n i t e l y made of skin and bone. Look c a r e f u l l y at the Christ C h i l d . Do - 4 - 2 0 5 you notice something odd about how the baby is represented?.... You probably noticed that he doesn't look much l i k e a baby - more l i k e a small adult! This was very common at that time. Because Christ was so important, i t was thought disrespectful to show him as a c h i l d . At that time children were thought of as mini adults by most people. Two other things to notice here are 1) that the cloth that forms the clothing looks almost carved, not soft and natural l i k e the face; and 2) that although the Madonna i s s i t t i n g on a throne i t has been drawn so that i t looks l i k e she may s l i d e right off i t . A r t i s t s were s t i l l "trying to solve the problem of how to make their people and setting look natural together. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #5 (Giotto, Madonna Enthroned, C.1311) This Madonna painted by the Italian,Giotto, at least 100 years l a t e r looks a l i t t l e more comfortable in her seat! The a r t i s t i s solving many of the problems of perspective. Perspective simply means how to draw furniture, rooms, and landscapes, so that they don't look f l a t or l i k e they are about to s l i d e out of the picture. The a r t i s t wants to show space in the picture in a r e a l i s t i c manner, so that a l l the objects are the right size and you can t e l l which objects are closer and which are further away. Looking at a picture with good perspective i s l i k e looking out of a window. Giotto's crowd around the throne r e a l l y looks l i k e they are behind one another. The Madonna looks l i k e a real flesh and blood person, although her baby looks quite mature. Notice also that the background i s not just f l a t gold but contains a crowd of people. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #6 (Giotto, Lamentation over Christ, 1305) The subject of this painting i s also a r e l i g i o u s story: the death of C h r i s t . Most paintings u n t i l t h i s time were of r e l i g i o u s s t o r i e s . The church and wealthy c i t i z e n s hired a r t i s t s to paint p a r t i c u l a r s t o r i e s so that the people of the church could "see" them. The a r t i s t could not afford to paint just what he wanted, and he had no time for this after doing what others hired him to do. What new thing do you notice about the background? Rocks, trees, h i l l s - a landscape. The a r t i s t did - 5 - 206 not just paint a f l a t , coloured background but made an attempt to place the event into a d e f i n i t e , r e a l i s t i c s e t t i n g . The arrangement of the people in that landscape i s much more interesting than you have seen before. They are not just strung „out in a row. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #7 (The C l o i s t e r s , Belle Heures, L i f e of St. Jerome, c.1410-13, close-up) A r t i s t s ' s k i l l s were also used to i l l u s t r a t e books for the church. This work was usually done by monks and called "Illuminated Manuscripts". This a r t i s t ' s figures are not a l l in a l i n e and they d e f i n i t e l y look l i k e they are moving! What does the a r t i s t do to show moving figures?.... (Some of the figures lean to suggest movement in that d i r e c t i o n . They are arranged in groups to the side of the picture. Their clothing has l o t s of curved l i n e s and looks l i k e i t flows in d i f f e r e n t d i r e c t i o n s , as clothes do when a person moves.) How d o e s t h e a r t i s t show t h a t p e o p l e a r e i n t h e d i s t a n c e ? ( p a u s e f o r a nswers) He p u t them h i g h up. Would t h e p e o p l e f i t i n t o t h e b u i l d i n g s ? ( p a u s e ) (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #8 (Masaccio,-The Tribute Money, c.1427, close-up) Masaccio was a very talented a r t i s t who died when he was only 27 years old, but l e f t us paintings which show great genius. What problem of e a r l i e r a r t i s t s has Masaccio solved here? (Notice the building and the clothes) (pause) You probably noticed that the people would probably f i t into the buildings. Did you notice that the clothing looks l i k e i t covers a real body? T h i s p a i n t i n g i s on a c h u r c h w a l l i n F l o r e n c e , I t a l y , b u t was p a i d f o r by a w e a l t h y c i t i z e n . He wanted e v e r y o n e t o know t h a t he had d o n a t e d t h i s g e n e r o u s g i f t t o t h e c h u r c h , so he had M a s a c c i o make one o f t h e p e o p l e l o o k l i k e him. Can you g u e s s w h i c h one i t m i g h t be? (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #9 (Masaccio, P r o f i l e of a Young Man, c.1425, 17"x 13") This customer or patron didn't have to have his picture f i t t e d into another but commissioned Masaccio to paint just himself. - 6 - 2 0 7 (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #10 (Mantegna, Calvary - 1457-9, close-up) This s l i d e i s to be used for a c t i v i t y #1 on your sheet. Turn to that now. Teacher note: leave s l i d e on the screen and stop the tape while the class works through task #1. (START TAPE) (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #11 (da V i n c i , The Last Supper, c.1495, close-up) Leonardo da Vinci was an a r t i s t whose interests were so varied that he was not only in demand as an a r t i s t but as an inventor of machines and weapons, and as a s c i e n t i s t . He even invented a helicopter - 400 years before motors had been invented. As an a r t i s t , he was also very inventive and because a l l of his experiments didn't work as he had hoped, some of his paintings have suffered greatly with age. This "Last Supper" i s one of them - i t has almost disappeared from the wall on which i t was painted. You w i l l have noticed that the l a s t few paintings we have looked at were painted on walls. This technique is c a l l e d fresco. The a r t i s t actually applies paint quickly to a damp, freshly plastered wall. Christ and the apostles are arranged in a l i n e right across the painting and the vanishing point for the perspective i s in the centre - emphasizing Christ as the most important figure. There i s not much movement in the picture to give a feeling of the drama of the event. How does da Vinci t e l l us that t h i s i s a very emotional event?.... Look closely at the faces - what wonderful expressions - they t e l l the story! What expressions do you see?.... (fear apprehension, d i s t r u s t , question ) (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #12 (da V i n c i , The Mona Li s a , 1503-6, 30"x 20") This famous lady i s probably one of the best known a r t i s t ' s models, perhaps because there i s an a i r of mystery about her. Da Vinci painted her p o r t r a i t on a small canvas, much smaller than this s l i d e makes i t look. The painting was done in o i l paints on canvas clo t h . Her husband commissioned the piece - that i s , he hired da Vinci to paint i t and paid him for the finished piece. - 7 - 208 The a r t i s t has c a r e f u l l y chosen colours that are quite d u l l and moody - browns, r i c h yellows, and golds. Her pose, the way she i s s i t t i n g , i s very calm, and the landscape behind her i s hazy and dream-like. A l l these things perk our interest in trying to figure out the story in the painting. Now, look at the face - what i s that expression? Hold your hand up to cover half of the face, divide i t up and down the centre. What expression do you see on that half of the face? Now do the same for the other h a l f . What do you see here?.... Now try to do these two expressions at once to your own face...(pause) Quite impossible isn't i t ! Da Vinci i s experimenting with how an a r t i s t can paint his painting s l i g h t l y d i f f e r e n t l y from what the model's face shows, perhaps in order to create a mood. When we look at Mona Lisa's face we can't t e l l that the a r t i s t has experimented - a l l we can t e l l i s that the result is very mysterious - what i s that lady thinking? Even though paintings can look quite r e a l i s t i c , we must remember that we are s t i l l looking at the a r t i s t ' s visual idea of something, not at the real thing. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide # 1 3 (Clouet, Francis I, c.1524, 3 7 " x 29") Most of the work we have seen so far was done in I t a l y . Now we w i l l look at work from the northern parts of Europe - France, Holland, England - places from which the early s e t t l e r s of Canada came. In 1524 the King of France commissioned an a r t i s t to do this painting of him. He wanted the painting to show how important and wealthy he was. The a r t i s t has used a few t r i c k s to give t h i s impression - he has made the body look larger and more powerful then history t e l l s us t h i s King of France was. He has shown f a b r i c s which look very r i c h and expensive. The face lacks the d e t a i l and realism that we saw da Vinci use in Italy a few years e a r l i e r - i t i s more a symbol of a king. Why do you suppose the a r t i s t put so much d e t a i l into the clothing and less into the face?.... Perhaps the message the painting gave about the subject's position was more important than how his face looked. Perhaps he was r e a l l y not an a t t r a c t i v e person? (NEXT SLIDE) Slide # 1 4 (Rubens, Assumption of the V i r g i n , c.1626, 50" x 3 7 " ) We have looked at many pictures that t e l l about Chri s t i a n r e l i g i o u s events l i k e this one - but what a difference we see here! Most of those we have seen - 8 - 209 were calm, with people standing or s i t t i n g quite straight, arranged neatly on the ground against a simple background. (STOP TAPE) Teacher Note: Leave s l i d e #14 on the screen, stop the tape and use these questions as a guide to a short class discussion. Leave th i s s l i d e on when you restart the tape. What makes the picture look so stormy?.... colours - which ones? l i n e s - a l l of the curved forms made by the curving l i n e s and the way the figures are posed - twisted, leaning - no two a l i k e . Also, there i s a cloudy background. (START TAPE) Most of the work we have seen has had people arranged evenly across the painting so that the canvas divides evenly up the centre. How i s thi s one divided?.... When i t looks l i k e a picture i s divided in two from corner to corner i t i s cal l e d a "diagonal". Look at how the upper l e f t of the painting i s composed of blue sky and the opposite side i s dark land. There are people along the divide. The people a l l point upwards so that you r e a l l y have the impression of the Vir g i n moving up to heaven. ( NEXT SLIDE) Slide #15 (Rembrandt, A r i s t o t l e Comtemplating the Bust of Homer, c.1653) In Holland, where th i s a r t i s t , Rembrandt, worked, the people had quite a d i f f e r e n t l i f e s t y l e than did those in France. They were Protestant, while the French were Roman Catholic, and their r e l i g i o n dictated that they l i v e a simple, s t r i c t l i f e . Paintings such as we have just seen were not acceptable to the church. The Dutch favoured dark colours, quite p l a i n buildings and furniture, and did not have a wealthy, extravagant king. This painting of an ancient Greek philosopher shows this very d i f f e r e n t attitude. The colours are very dark and sombre, the clothing on the man i s quite simple. Rembrandt i s experimenting with how he can use l i g h t to made a picture look dramatic. He uses very l i g h t sections to emphasize the face, what he i s looking at and the connection between the man and the object. The rest of the work i s very dark. This contrast between dark and l i g h t i s c a l l chiaroscuro. Notice how the l i g h t areas form a triangle with the face at the top point. Also, i t i s - 9 - 210 d u l l a l l around the face, which causes the face to stand out. Although the painting i s of a philosopher from the 4th century B.C. Greece, the a r t i s t has chosen to portray his subject in clothes fashionable during his own time. Why do you think he did this? (pause) (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #16'(Lorrain, Pastoral Landscape - 17th century) This landscape was painted in France at about the time the f i r s t s e t t l e r s were leaving the country for Canada. Here the a r t i s t i s showing the countryside with some people in i t . Is his subject the land or the people? Before, we always saw the people as the main subject with the landscape used only as background. Here the people are the least important thing - i t doesn't matter who they are, but where they are. Do you suppose the countryside r e a l l y looked l i k e t h i s ? . . . . This i s what we c a l l a romantic landscape - one that looks more l i k e a lovely dream place than a real one. Notice the mist, the soft colour and the eerie atmosphere. This painting was probably not commissioned because, by this time, a r t i s t s were beginning to choose the subjects they wished to paint. (NEXT SLIDE) Slide #17 (Gainsborough, The B a i l l i e Family, 1784) The B a i l l i e family of England decided that they wanted a painting of the whole family so they commissioned Gainsborough to do thi s painting. Can you imagine standing there for hours and hours while the a r t i s t painted t h i s picture! Probably not everyone in i t did. The a r t i s t did some drawings of the family, both separately and as a group, decided how to arrange them in the most e f f e c t i v e way, and then painted the picture c a l l i n g the family members back only so that he could capture d e t a i l s . Do you suppose they always dressed t h i s way for a t y p i c a l day at home? Have you ever had a family p o r t r a i t taken by a photographer? How did you dress? Like the landcape we just saw, this picture i s quite romantic and idealized - the perfect family i n the i r perfect clothes against a lovely background. - 10 - 211 ( N E X T S L I D E ) S l i d e #18 (Renoir, La B al a B o u g i v a l , 1883, 70" x 37") In the l a t e 1800's, about 100 years ago, p a i n t i n g changed q u i t e a b i t . A r t i s t s began to p a i n t o r d i n a r y people, r a t h e r than j u s t the wealthy. T h i s was because the a r t i s t s changed t h e i r way of working. They would p a i n t the p i c t u r e s f i r s t and then worry about t r y i n g to s e l l them, i n s t e a d of working mostly f o r commissions. This gave them more freedom to explo r e d i f f e r e n t s u b j e c t s . As w e l l , there were more people who co u l d a f f o r d to buy p a i n t i n g s s i n c e there were no longer j u s t poorer working people, a few middle c l a s s people and the very wealthy. Now there was a l a r g e middle c l a s s of business people who wanted t o buy small p a i n t i n g s f o r t h e i r homes - not the huge w a l l s i z e p i e c e s of e a r l i e r times that took years to complete. It was at t h i s time t h a t c i t i e s were growing r a p i d l y because new technology was making i t p o s s i b l e to s e t up f a c t o r i e s to produce c l o t h , t o o l s , and c l o t h i n g , and to process metals f o r machinery and r a i l r o a d s . Many people moved to the c i t y from the country to work i n these new i n d u s t r i e s and to s e t up businesses such as shops to support the i n d u s t r y and pro v i d e goods and food f o r the workers. These business people became the new middle c l a s s who had money to spend. Renoir was i n t e r e s t e d not i n t h i s p a r t i c u l a r couple but i n the way the l i g h t played on the f i g u r e s and the way c o l o u r s work. The c o l o u r s are l i g h t and a l i v e - l i k e c a r e f r e e dancers. These are o r d i n a r y people e n j o y i n g themselves on a b e a u t i f u l summer day. How can you t e l l i t i s summer? (pause to d i s c u s s ) (NEXT SLIDE) S l i d e #19 (Daumier, T h i r d C l a s s C a r r i a g e , 1862, 26" x 35") A r t i s t s a l s o began to use t h e i r work to make statements or comments about p o l i t i c s and l i f e . This i s c a l l e d s o c i a l comment. Here some very poor farm people are f o r c e d to t r a v e l i n an uncomfortable r a i l w a y car with a l l of t h e i r p o s s e s s i o n s i n bundles. There i s nothing romantic about t h i s t i r e d mother, who i s tending her baby! Daumier has used l i g h t ( c h i a r o s c u r o ) to emphasis these women. I t i s a very r e v e a l i n g l i g h t t h a t emphasizes t h e i r t i r e d f a c e s . He has used o u t l i n e s to emphasize the l i n e s of the f a c e s . These women are much l i k e those who would - 11 - 212 have t r a v e l l e d to Canada to t r y to f i n d a b e t t e r l i f e . When you v i s i t the Surrey A r t G a l l e r y , you w i l l see how a r t i s t s p o rtrayed the l i f e and people of the new land - Canada. As the country grew and changed so d i d the scope of the a r t i s t s . You w i l l see how t h e i r a r t changed to become more e x p r e s s i v e of i n d i v i d u a l s ' thoughts, p e r s o n a l i t i e s and f e e l i n g s . 2 1 3 SURREY ART GALLERY: SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART; PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT SLIDE LIST: 1) Thebes, Ladies and M u s i c i a n s , tomb p a i n t i n g , c.1400 B.C. 2) C l a s s i c a l Greece, Ruvo, tomb mural, V e i l e d Women, 4th C. B.C. 3) France, Bayeux Tapestry, c.1073-83. 4) Byzantine School, Enthroned Madonna and C h i l d , 13 C , 52 x 30 i n . 5) G i o t t o , ( I t a l y ) , Madonna Enthroned,•c.1311. 6) G i o t t o , ( I t a l y ) , Lamentation Over C h r i s t , 1305. 7) The C l o i s t e r s , ( F r a n c e ) , B e l l e s Heures, L i f e of St. Jerome, c.1410-13, c l o s e - u p . 8) Masaccio, ( I t a l y ) , The T r i b u t e Money, c.1427, c l o s e - u p . 9) Masaccio, ( I t a l y ) , P r o f i l e of a Young Man, c.1425, 17 x 13 i n . 10) Mantegna, ( I t a l y ) , C a l v a r y , 1457-59, tempera and o i l on wood, c l o s e - u p . 11) Leonardo da V i n c i , ( I t a l y ) , The Last Supper, c.1495-98. 12) Leonardo da V i n c i , ( I t a l y ) , The Mona L i s a , 1503-6, o i l on wood panel, 30-1/4 x 20-7/8 i n . 13) Jean C l o u e t , ( F r a n c e ) , F r a n c i s I, c. 1524, tempera and o i l on board, 37-3/4 x 29-1/8. 14) Peter Paul Rubens, ( F l a n d e r s ) , Assumption of the V i r g i n , c.1626, 50 x 37 i n . 15) Rembrandt, ( H o l l a n d ) , A r i s t o t l e Contemplating the Bust of Homer, 1653, o i l on canvas, 56-1/2 x 53-3/4 i n . 16) Claude L o r r a i n ( F r a n c e ) , P a s t o r a l Landscape: The Roman Compagna, 17th C., o i l on canvas, 40 x 52-1/2 i n . 17) Gainsborough, (England), The B a i l l i e Family, 1784, o i l on canvas, 40 x 52-1/2 i n . 18) P i e r r e Auguste Renoir, ( F r a n c e ) , La Bal a B o u g i v a l , 1883, o i l on canvas, 70 x 37 i n . 20) Honore Daumier, ( F r a n c e ) , T h i r d C l a s s C a r r i a g e , o i l on canvas, 26 x 35 i n .  2 1 5 SURREY ART GALLERY - SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART WORKSHOP THE ACTIVITY SHEET THERE IS A QUIZ TO SEE HOW WELL YOU LISTENED TO THE PRESENTATION. p o r t r a i t p e r s p e c t i v e landscape f r e s c o commission pose c h i a r o s c u r o romantic s o c i a l comment t a p e s t r y s u b j e c t 216 ACTIVITY #1 Look c a r e f u l l y a t the p a i n t i n g on the scre e n by the a r t i s t Mantegna who p a i n t e d i t i n 1457 i n I t a l y . He has d i s c o v e r e d a formula f o r g e t t i n g the p e r s p e c t i v e r i g h t ! ! On the o u t l i n e below, t r a c e the l i n e s from the pavement stones, making them longer and longer u n t i l they a l l meet i n a p o i n t T h i s p o i n t i s c a l l e d the v a n i s h i n g p o i n t (please l a b e l i t on your p i c t u r e ! ! ) Now...find what ot h e r l i n e s can be lengthened so t h a t they a l s o meet a t t h i s p o i n t . Draw them i n too. Now, u s i n g s t i c k ^ - p e o p l e , f i t the f i g u r e s i n t o the p i c t u r e . Look c a r e f u l l y a t the p i c t u r e you have now done and t r y to f i g u r e out how the v a n i s h i n g p o i n t i s used to p o i n t out the importance of the event. 2 1 7 ACTIVITY #2 Now l e t ' s f i n d out what new words you have learned. F i l l i n the blanks i n the following section with the correct word .from the l i s t at the beginning of the a c t i v i t y sheets. Hint: read through each sentence f i r s t ; there may be a clue to a missing word afte r the blank i n the sentence. 1. 's FATHER WAS A VERY WEALTHY MAN IN 1500. your name HE DECIDED THAT HE MUST HAVE A PICTURE OF HIS CHILD PAINTED SO....HE CALLED UPON THE ARTIST DA VINCI TO HIM TO DO A OF THE CHILD! ! SAID CHILD WAS NOT HAPPY TO HAVE TO SIT AND FOR THE PAINTING. THANK GOODNESS IT WAS ONLY TO BE A SMALL PAINTING AND NOT A HUGE TAKING UP THE WHOLE PLASTER WALL! ! ! IT WOULD HAVE MADE MUCH HAPPIER IF FATHER your name HAD WANTED A NICE SHOWING THE COUNTRYSIDE. 2 . C i r c l e the correct meaning for the following word: Chiaroscuro i s a) a hot I t a l i a n meal b) a type of colour pattern c) the dramatic use of l i g h t and dark d) a type of chair 3 . C i r c l e the correct meaning for the underlined words i n the following: A romantic painting shows people a) i n love, b) i n an un- r e a l i s t i c , perfect dreamlike way or, c) i n their homes. However, an a r t i s t who wants to make a s o c i a l comment wants his paintings to show, a) happy, r i c h people, b) how f a i r and equal l i f e i s for everyone, or c) how d i f f i c u l t l i f e i s for some people. 218 ACTIVITY #3 - NOW IS YOUR CHANCE TO BE THE ARTIST. WHEN YOU COME TO THE SURREY ART GALLERY WE WOULD LIKE TO SEE THE PICTURES YOU PRODUCE IN THIS EXERCISE. IMAGINE the Pharoah of Egypt has decided that you, h i s humble s l a v e , must p a i n t a w a l l f o r his tomb!! In the space below p l a n what your s e c t i o n w i l l look l i k e . Remember t h a t you must show something about the r u l e r ' s l i f e t h a t w i l l t e l l how wealthy he i s or what good deeds he has done. REMEMBER THE FORMULA THAT ANCIENT EGYPTIAN ARTISTS USED TO DRAW P E O P L E - heads i n p r o f i l e (from the side) eyes from the f r o n t shoulders from the f r o n t l e g s from the s i d e and.... a l l of the f i g u r e s a re i n a row.. 219 SURREY ART GALLERY - SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART WORKSHOP FOR THIS ACTIVITY SHEET YOU WILL NEED TO HAVE A >y^AND A V\ M LISTEN''FOR THESE WORDS THROUGHOUT THE LESSON! AT THE END OF THE ACTIVITY SHEET THERE IS A QUIZ TO SEE HOW WELL YOU LISTENED TO THE PRESENTATION. p o r t r a i t - a painting or photograph of a person, e s p e c i a l l y their face p e r s p e c t i v e - a way to draw furniture, rooms and landscapes so they show depth instead of looking f l a t landscape - a painting or photograph of scenery fresco - a painting done on a damp, freshly plastered wall commission - to hire someone to make something and pay them for the f i n i s h e d product (e.g. hire an a r t i s t to paint a p o r t r a i t ) pose - the way the subject of a painting i s s i t t i n g or standing (can apply to sculpture, photography etc.) chiaroscuro- the contrast between l i g h t and dark romantic- lovely, dreamlike, unreal s o c i a l comment- a statement about p o l i t i c s and l i f e tapestry - hand woven f a b r i c decorated with s t i t c h i n g to be used as decoration i n homes and churches subject - what the work of art i s about 220 A C T I V I T Y #1 Look c a r e f u l l y a t the p a i n t i n g on the s c r e e n by the a r t i s t Mantegna who p a i n t e d i t i n 1457 i n I t a l y . He has d i s c o v e r e d a formula f o r g e t t i n g the p e r s p e c t i v e r i g h t ! ! On the o u t l i n e below, t r a d e the l i n e s from the pavement stones, making them longer and longer u n t i l they a l l meet i n a p o i n t T h i s p o i n t i s c a l l e d the v a n i s h i n g p o i n t (please l a b e l i t on your p i c t u r e ! ! ) Now...find what o t h e r l i n e s can be lengthened so t h a t they alsc meet a t t h i s p o i n t . Draw them i n too. Now, u s i n g s t i c k ^ - p e o p l e , f i t the f i g u r e s i n t o the p i c t u r e . Look c a r e f u l l y a t the p i c t u r e you have now done and t r y to f i g u r e out how the v a n i s h i n g p o i n t i s used to p o i n t out the importance of the event. 221 ACTIVITY #2 Now l e t ' s f i n d out what new words you have l e a r n e d . F i l l i n the blanks i n the f o l l o w i n g s e c t i o n w i t h the c o r r e c t word from the l i s t a t the b e g i n n i n g of the a c t i v i t y s h eets. H i n t : read through each sentence f i r s t ; t h ere may be a c l u e to a mi s s i n g word a f t e r the blank i n the sentence. 1. 's FATHER WAS A VERY WEALTHY MAN IN 1500. your name HE DECIDED THAT HE MUST HAVE A PICTURE OF HIS CHILD PAINTED SO HE CALLED UPON THE ARTIST DA VINCI TO commission HIM TO DO A p o r t r a i t OF THE CHILD! ! SAID CHILD WAS NOT HAPPY TO HAVE TO SIT AND pose FOR THE PAINTING '. THANK GOODNESS IT WAS ONLY TO BE A SMALL PAINTING AND NOT A HUGE f r e s c o TAKING UP THE WHOLE PLASTER WALL! ! ! IT WOULD HAVE MADE MUCH HAPPIER IF FATHER your name HAD WANTED A NICE landscape • SHOWING THE COUNTRYSIDE. 2. C i r c l e the c o r r e c t meaning f o r the f o l l o w i n g word: C h i a r o s c u r o i s a) a hot I t a l i a n meal b) a type of c o l o u r p a t t e r n (g) the dramatic use of l i g h t and dark d) a type of c h a i r 3. C i r c l e the c o r r e c t meaning f o r the u n d e r l i n e d words i n the f o l l o w i n g : A romantic p a i n t i n g shows people a) i n l o v e , © i n an un- r e a l i s t i c , p e r f e c t d r e a m l i k e way or, c) i n t h e i r homes. However, an a r t i s t who wants to make a s o c i a l comment wants h i s p a i n t i n g s t o show, a) happy, r i c h people, b) how f a i r and e q u a l l i f e i s f o r everyone, or © how d i f f i c u l t l i f e i s f o r some people. 222 ACTIVITY # 3 - NOW IS YOUR CHANCE TO BE THE ARTIST. WHEN Y O U COME TO THE SURREY ART GALLERY WE WOULD LIKE T O SEE THE PICTURES YOU PRODUCE IN THIS EXERCISE. IMAGINE the Pharoah of Egypt has decid e d t h a t you, h i s humble s l a v e , must p a i n t a w a l l f o r h i s tomb!! In the space below p l a n what your s e c t i o n w i l l look l i k e . Remember t h a t you must show something about the r u l e r ' s l i f e t h a t w i l l t e l l how wealthy he i s or what good deeds he has done. R E M E M B E R T H E FORMULA THAT ANCIENT EGYPTIAN ARTISTS USED T O D R A W P E O P L E - heads i n p r o f i l e (from the side) eyes from the f r o n t s h o u l d e r s from the f r o n t l e g s from the s i d e and.... a l l of the f i g u r e s are i n a row.. 2 2 3 APPENDIX 9 224 SURREY ART GALLERY SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART A WORKSHOP ABOUT THE FIGURE IN CANADIAN PAINTING INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Set out the v i s u a l s so s t u d e n t s can a l l see them. INTRODUCTION In f r o n t of you a r e s e v e r a l v e r y d i f f e r e n t p i c t u r e s . Even though they a r e d i f f e r e n t from each o t h e r , can you see what they a l l have i n common? INSTRUCTOR NOTE: A l l o w s t u d e n t s t o d i s c u s s what the answer might be u n t i l t h ey come up w i t h 1 p e o p l e . ' In t h i s workshop we w i l l l o o k a t p i c t u r e s of p e o p l e done by Canadian a r t i s t s . The work of these a r t i s t s has much t o t e l l us about the a r t i s t s , the t r a d i t i o n s t h a t a r e b e h i n d t h e i r work, the l i v e s o f the peopl e i n the p i c t u r e s and the h i s t o r y of Canada as a n a t i o n of peopl e - n a t i v e p e o p l e and p e o p l e who came here from o t h e r l a n d s . Canadian a r t came out of the t r a d i t i o n s o f European a r t , such as t h a t w h i c h you saw i n your c l a s s r o o m p r e s e n t a t i o n , and g r a d u a l l y became something s p e c i a l t o Canada. Du r i n g t h i s p r e s e n t a t i o n l i s t e n f o r t h e s e new words: c o m p o s i t i o n r e p r e s e n t s monochromatic s i t t e r t r a d i t i o n c i v i l i a n r e a l i s t i c a u t h e n t i c SLIDE (Ha i d a , human f a c e mask, wood and p a i n t ) - Canada's e a r l i e s t ^ A p e o p l e , b o t h I n d i a n s and I n u i t , produced many o b j e c t s which have come t o be c o n s i d e r e d a r t . Many o f t h e s e p e o p l e l i v e d a l i f e t h a t r e q u i r e d them t o move about f r e q u e n t l y , f o l l o w i n g the a n i m a l s and f i s h w h i c h were t h e i r s o u r c e o f f o o d . T h i s l i f e - s t y l e d i d n o t l e a v e them time t o produce o b j e c t s o n l y as d e c o r a t i o n s f o r t h e i r homes, nor d i d t h e p e o p l e want t o c a r r y about o b j e c t s t h a t had no p r a c t i c a l p u r p o s e . I n s t e a d , t hey used t h e i r a r t i s t i c a b i l i t i e s t o d e c o r a t e c l o t h i n g and t o o l s or t o c r e a t e o b j e c t s t h a t were p a r t of r e l i g i o u s r i t u a l s . 225 - 2 - T h i s mask was made t o be used i n a Haida I n d i a n ceremony. A mask i s r e a l l y a f a l s e f a c e and was used by t h e Haida to i n d i c a t e t h a t the wearer was t r a n s f o r m e d i n t o a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r . T h i s one r e p r e s e n t s a human f a c e - n o t a p a r t i c u l a r p e r s o n , but humans i n g e n e r a l . The mask maker made t h i s mask i n a t r a d i t i o n a l d e s i g n . In o t h e r words, he used t h i s d e s i g n because h i s p e o p l e had always made human f a c e masks l o o k l i k e t h i s . NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Thebes, tomb p a i n t i n g , c l 4 0 0 B.C.) - Remember the a r t of the #1B E g y p t i a n s , where p e o p l e were a l l drawn t h e same way - not as i n d i v i d u a l s ? F o r b o t h the Haida and the E g y p t i a n s , the human was used o n l y as a p a r t o f the s t o r y , n o t as a p a r t i c u l a r i n - d i v i d u a l . NEXT SLIDE SLIDE ( F r e r e Luc, F r a n c e B r i n g i n g the F a i t h , 1671, o i l on canvas, #2A 218.4 X 218.4 cm). Among the e a r l i e s t p e o p l e t o come t o Canada t o s e t t l e were peo p l e from F r a n c e . They s e t t l e d i n e a s t e r n Canada i n what i s now Quebec, New B r u n s w i c k and Nova S c o t i a . These p e o p l e l e f t F rance t o t r y t o f i n d a new l i f e f o r t hemselves - a l i f e w i t h o u t p o v e r t y , w i t h o u t t i g h t c o n t r o l of t he government and w i t h o u t a f u t u r e t h a t h e l d l i t t l e hope f o r b e t t e r t i m e s . I n Canada, they hoped t o l i v e t he a d v e n t u r - ous l i f e of the e x p l o r e r s , share i n t h e w e a l t h of the f u r t r a d e r s o r perhaps own t h e i r own farm. The F r e n c h Roman C a t h o l i c Church saw the o p p o r t u n i t y to b r i n g C h r i s t i a n i t y t o the n a t i v e p e o p l e of Canada. The government of F r a n c e and the Roman C a t h o l i c Church s e n t r e p r e s e n t a t i v e s t o l o o k a f t e r the org a n - i z a t i o n of the new l a n d s . F r e r e Luc was a monk i n the Roman C a t h o l i c Church who came t o Canada t o h e l p s e t up the c h u r c h i n the 1600's. He was a l s o an a r t i s t who used h i s t a l e n t s t o t e l l t h e s t o r y of the c h u r c h i n t he new l a n d . Here he t e l l s of F r a n c e b r i n g i n g the C h r i s t i a n f a i t h t o the n a t i v e s . He i s u s i n g p e o p l e i n t h e p i c t u r e t o r e p r e s e n t d i f f e r e n t groups of p e o p l e . 3 - 3 - 226 SLIDE #2B SLIDE #2A SLIDE #2B INSTRUCTOR NOTE: D i s c u s s t h e p a i n t i n g u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g q u e s t i o n s as g u i d e l i n e s : Can anyone t e l l me a b o u t t h e r e l i g i o n t h e I n d i a n s had b e f o r e t h e coming o f t h e w h i t e man? Who i s ' F r a n c e ' ? How c a n you t e l l ? F r e r e L uc was t r a i n e d a s an a r t i s t i n t h e m o n a s t e r i e s o f F r a n c e and t h e r e f o r e shows t h e C a n a d i a n c o u n t r y s i d e l o o k i n g l i k e F r a n c e . NEXT SLIDE ( C l a u d e L o r r a i n , P a s t o r a l L a n d s c a p e , 1 7 t h c e n t u r y , o i l on c a n v a s , 40 X 42*2 cm) . Do you remember t h i s p a i n t i n g f r o m y o u r c l a s s - room p r e s e n t a t i o n ? Look a t how F r e r e L u c ' s Canada l o o k s j u s t l i k e L o r r a i n ' s ' r o m a n t i c ' F r e n c h c o u n t r y s i d e ! I s t h i s how you i m a g i n e t h e w i l d , u n e x p l o r e d C a n a d i a n f o r e s t l a n d w o u l d have l o o k e d ? INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Review t h e meaning o f ' r o m a n t i c ' i . e . an i d e a l i z e d v i s i o n o f how one m i g h t i m a g i n e a p l a c e . NEXT SLIDE ( F r e r e L u c, M o n s i g n e u r de L a v a l , 1671-2, o i l on c a n v a s ) (Anonymous, Mere J e a n F r a n c o i s e , 1684, o i l on c a n v a s , 71.1 X 58.4 cm). INSTRUCTOR NOTE: D i s c u s s t h e s e s l i d e s u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g q u e s t i o n s a s a g u i d e l i n e : What c a n you t e l l a b o u t t h e s e p e o p l e by t h e i r c l o t h i n g ? . . . t h e i r e x - p r e s s i o n s ? . . . t h e way t h e y a r e po s e d ? . . . t h e c o l o u r s t h e a r t i s t has c h o s e n t o u s e ? 4 - 4 - 227 A r t i s t s were p a i d t o p a i n t p i c t u r e s o f thes e i m p o r t a n t p e o p l e so t h a t t h e r e would be a r e c o r d of what they l o o k e d l i k e . Remember t h i s was l o n g b e f o r e t h e photograph was i n v e n t e d . A l s o , the a r t i s t s came from Europe where they r e c e i v e d t h e i r a r t t r a i n i n g . C o n s e q u e n t l y , t h e y p a i n t e d the p e o p l e of Canada e x a c t l y t h e same way they would p a i n t p e o p l e i n Europe. The p a i n t i n g s , t h e r e f o r e , a re not d i s - t i n c t l y Canadian. These p o r t r a i t s a r e v e r y f o r m a l - t h a t i s , the a r t i s t shows the p e o p l e s i t t i n g i n v e r y s t i f f p o s i t i o n s u s i n g sombre c o l o u r s and does n ot use a background t o t e l l p a r t of the s t o r y about the p e r s o n . These are p e o p l e of the ch u r c h - a p r i e s t and a nun, so th e y must l o o k s e r i o u s , i n - t e l l i g e n t and i m p o r t a n t . They must l o o k l i k e p e o p l e who command g r e a t r e s p e c t . The a r t i s t can g i v e a g r e a t d e a l of i n f o r m a t i o n about t h e s i t t e r s by the p o s i t i o n s i n wh i c h he p u t s them and the ex- p r e s s i o n he shows on t h e i r f a c e s (remember the Mona L i s a and her s m i l e ? ) ACTIVITY: (Leave t h e s l i d e on the s c r e e n . Turn on the l i g h t s . D i v i d e the group i n t o p a i r s and g i v e each p a i r a m i r r o r ) . Now we a r e g o i n g t o p r e t e n d t h a t we a r e a l l a r t i s t s p r e p a r i n g t o p a i n t a p o r t r a i t - a p i c t u r e of a p a r t i c u l a r t y p e o f p e r s o n . One o f you i s t h e a r t i s t and the o t h e r i s the s i t t e r - t he p e r s o n b e i n g p a i n t e d . The m i r r o r w i l l be the p a i n t i n g . I w i l l g i v e you a s h e e t of paper w i t h a c h a r a c t e r t o be p a i n t e d and you must a r r a n g e t h e s i t t e r so t h a t your p a i n t i n g t e l l s as much about the s u b j e c t as p o s s i b l e . Re- member, we w i l l o n l y see the head and s h o u l d e r s and maybe the arms. When you a r e f i n i s h e d , we w i l l choose a few p o r t r a i t s and see i f we can guess who you have p a i n t e d . You w i l l have about 5 m i n u t e s t o complete your p o r t r a i t . (Pass o u t a f o l d e d paper t o each a r t i s t . Suggested c h a r a c t e r s : the mayor, a movie s t a r , a f a r m e r , a p e r s o n t h a t ' s . . . 5 - 5 - 228 warm and f r i e n d l y , a mean o l d m i s e r . Have t h e c h i l d r e n change p l a c e s when f i n i s h e d so t h e s i t t e r s g e t a c h a n c e t o be t h e a r t i s t s . The p a p e r s c o u l d be c o l l e c t e d and r e s h u f f l e d o r you may w i s h ±o p r o v i d e new o n e s ) . NEXT SLIDE SLIDE ( E x V o t o - Mme. R i v e r i n , 1703, o i l on canvas, 40 X 52 cm) #4A SLIDE ( E x V o t o - 3 C a s t a w a y s , 1754, o i l on b o a r d , 12 X 20 cm) #4B As w e l l a s p a y i n g t o have p o r t r a i t s o f t h e m s e l v e s p a i n t e d , some o f t h e p e o p l e o f e a r l y F r e n c h Canada h i r e d a r t i s t s t o p a i n t "ex v o t o " p a i n t i n g s . "Ex v o t o " i s a L a t i n p h r a s e w h i c h means " o u t o f a vow." P e o p l e had t h e s e p a i n t i n g s p a i n t e d t o r e c o r d t h e i r g r a t i t u d e f o r h a v i n g b een s a v e d f r o m a c r i s i s . T h e s e were a v e r y p o p u l a r t y p e o f p a i n t i n g i n E u r o p e among C a t h o l i c p e o p l e . Our e a r l y F r e n c h s e t t l e r s i m i t a t e d t h i s c u s t o m o f t h e i r homeland. The a r t i s t s who p a i n t e d t h e s e works were u s u a l l y p e o p l e w i t h l i t t l e t r a i n i n g and c o u l d be c o n s i d e r e d t h e f i r s t r e a l ' C a n a d i a n ' a r t i s t s b e c a u s e t h e y were n o t t r a i n e d i n E u r o p e . They a r e v e r y i n f o r m a l and v e r y human. The w e a l t h y Madam R i v e r i n a nd h e r c h i l d r e n h e r e g i v e t h a n k s f o r t h e i r r e s c u e f r o m a s h i p w r e c k . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: What do you su p p o s e i s t h e s t o r y b e h i n d t h e o t h e r p a i n t i n g ? (On J une 17, 1754, w h i l e c r o s s i n g t h e r i v e r , a b o a t w i t h 2 men and 3 young women o v e r - t u r n e d and t h e 3 young women f e l l i n t o t h e w a t e r . W i t h t h e h e l p o f S t . Anne t h e t h r e e g i r l s were r e s c u e d ) . Which o f t h e two p a i n t - i n g s a p p e a r t o have been done by t h e b e t t e r t r a i n e d a r t i s t ? What c l u e s h e l p you f o r m y o u r o p i n i o n ? (Mme. R i v e r i n - more d e t a i l , f a b r i c d r a p e r y ) . ( C astaways - n o t p r o p o r - t i o n e d , l a c k o f p e r s p e c t i v e , l a c k of a t t e n - t i o n t o d e t a i l ) . 5 - 6 - 229 NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Kane, ( I n d i a n s P l a y i n g a t A l c o l o h , c l 8 5 1 - 6 , o i l on c a n v a s , # 5 A 18 X 29 i n c h e s ) " SLIDE (Kane, S k e t c h e s , c l 8 5 0 ) # 5B The s e t t l e r s who came t o Canada from Europe saw many new s i g h t s and f a c e d many h a r d s h i p s . The n a t i v e p e o p l e were a c u r i o s i t y t o the Europeans. Because t h e i r way of l i f e was so d i f f e r e n t from t h a t of the s e t t l e r s , some of the s e t t l e r s r e g a r d e d them w i t h a m i x t u r e of f e a r , d i s t r u s t and i g n o r a n c e , as w e l l as c u r i o s i t y . They were p o p u l a r s u b j e c t s f o r a r t i s t s because they were new t o them and because they were a s o u r c e of c u r i o s i t y f o r p e o p l e l i v i n g i n Canada's growing c i t i e s and p e o p l e s t i l l i n Europe. As Canada became more s e t t l e d and s e t t l e m e n t s moved westward, some a r t i s t s saw the I n d i a n l i f e s t y l e as b e i n g i n danger of d i s a p p e a r i n g . These a r t i s t s wanted t o make s u r e t h e r e was a r e c o r d of t h e s e p e o p l e , whom they c o n s i d e r e d n o b l e . A r t i s t s such as P a u l Kane, who grew up i n Canada b u t s t u d i e d a r t i n Europe, t r a v e l l e d the c o u n t r y d o i n g s k e t c h e s of n a t i v e p e o p l e . They th e n took the s k e t c h e s i n t o t h e i r s t u d i o s and used them as models t o compose l a r g e p a i n t i n g s on canvas. These s k e t c h e s were v e r y l o o s e and f r e e . Sometimes they were done i n p e n c i l and o t h e r times i n c o l o u r , u s i n g w a t e r - c o l o u r or o i l p a i n t s . The f i n i s h e d canvases ended up l o o k - i n g v e r y c a r e f u l l y p l a n n e d , w i t h p e o p l e s t a n d i n g i n s t i f f f o r m a t i o n i n a l a n d s c a p e t h a t l o o k s more l i k e a m a n i c u r e d E n g l i s h garden than the w i l d s of the f o r e s t . I n o r d e r t o g i v e the i m p r e s s i o n of the d i g n i t y o f the p e o p l e , the a r t i s t used t e c h n i q u e s used by European p a i n t e r s when th e y r o m a n t i - c i z e d t h e i r s u b j e c t s . NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Gainsborough, The B a i l l i e F a m i l y , 1784) #6B Do you remember s e e i n g t h i s f a m i l y p o r t r a i t b e f o r e ? How does i t compare t o P a u l Kane's I n d i a n group? ( i . e . s k y , h i l l s ) . - 7 - 230 SLIDE #6A SLIDE #7A SLIDE #7B ( W i l l i a m B e r c z y , Joseph B r a n t , 1 7 9 7 , o i l on canvas) T h i s p o r t r a i t of the famous c h i e f , Joseph B r a n t , l o o k s more l i k e a s t a t u e than a r e a l p e r s o n . A l t h o u g h by a l l r e p o r t s , the famous I n d i a n l e a d e r was a handsome and im p o s i n g man. T h i s p a i n t i n g l o o k s l i k e an a c t o r p l a y i n g an I n d i a n c h i e f . P o r t r a i t s of a c t o r s or of people i n t h e a t r e costumes were v e r y p o p u l a r i n England d u r i n g t h i s t i m e . T h i s a r t i s t , W i l l i a m B e r c z y , chose t o copy the s t y l e of t h e s e p a i n t i n g s . NEXT SLIDE ( K r i e g h o f f , H a b i t a n t s ' C a b i n , 1 8 5 0 ' s , o i l on canvas) ( C r u i k s h a n k , B r e a k i n g Road, 1 8 9 4 , o i l on c a n v a s , 8 8 . 9 X 172.7cm) The l i f e of t h e s e s e t t l e r s who wanted t o farm was a d i f f i c u l t one. There were few roads t o t h e farms and t h o s e t h a t e x i s t e d were v e r y rough. The p e o p l e l i v e d i n i s o l a t i o n - f a r from n e i g h b o u r s and s t o r e s - and had t o r e l y on t h e i r i n v e n t i v e n e s s t o c l e a r the l a n d , b u i l d the farms, f e e d and c l o t h e the f a m i l y and t o e n t e r t a i n t h e m s e l v e s . Many a r t i s t s wanted t o r e c o r d t h i s l i f e s t y l e . These were a r t i s t s who grew up i n Canada b u t had gone t o e i t h e r Europe or the U n i t e d S t a t e s t o s t u d y p a i n t i n g f o r m a l l y . P a i n t i n g s o f s e t t l e r s became q u i t e p o p u l a r among b u s i n e s s people i n the f a s t g r o w i n g Canadian c i t i e s , who c o u l d a f f o r d t o buy p a i n t i n g s . The a r t i s t s would not w a i t u n t i l they had customers b e f o r e p a i n t i n g , b u t would p a i n t a s e r i e s of p a i n t i n g s and then t r y t o s e l l them. O f t e n they had t o s u p p o r t themselves i n o t h e r ways, when p a i n t i n g d i d n o t produce enough money. They worked as t e a c h e r s , s i g n p a i n t e r s , house p a i n t e r s , any j o b t h a t would g i v e them money t o c o n t i n u e w i t h t h e i r a r t . The image of l i f e t h a t t h e s e a r t i s t s showed was o f t e n v e r y roman- t i c . The customers wanted t o see a c a r e f r e e , i d y l l i c l i f e . They d i d not want t o see the h a r d s h i p s of t h e r u r a l s e t t l e r s . Which of t h e s e p a i n t i n g s would you t h i n k i s most t r u e t o l i f e ? ( C r u i k s h a n k - B r e a k i n g Road - c o o l c o l o u r s , l o o k s c o l d and d r e a r y , s t r u g g l i n g a n i m a l s , g r i m f a c e d f a r m e r s ) . 8 - 8 - 231 SLIDE #8A SLIDE #8B NEXT SLIDE ( K r i e g h o f f , J.B. J o l i f o u , A u b e r g e r y 1871, o i l on c a n v a s ) ( H a r r i s , A M e e t i n g o f t h e S c h o o l T r u s t e e s , 1885, o i l on c a n v a s ) K r i e g h o f f s p o r t r a y a l o f t h e s e t t l e r s e n j o y i n g a happy t i m e p e r h a p s g i v e s an u n r e a l i s t i c v i e w o f t h e l i f e s t y l e . I t i s more l i k e l y t h a t t h i s was a r a r e , s p e c i a l o c c a s i o n . I n r e a l i t y , t h e s e t t l e r s i n a l l p a r t s o f Canada had t o f a c e many p r o b l e m s as t h e y worked t o s e t up t h e i r c o m m u n i t i e s . Look c a r e f u l l y a t t h i s s e c o n d p a i n t i n g . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: D i s c u s s t h e f o l l o w i n g q u e s t i o n s : Can you f i g u r e o u t what t h i s i s ? (a s c h o o l room - b l a c k b o a r d , d e s k ) . Can you t e l l who t h e l a d y i s ? ( s c h o o l t e a c h e r ) Who a r e t h e men? ( f a r m e r s , p a r e n t s , r e p r e s e n t community- s c h o o l t r u s t e e s ) . What i s h a p p e n i n g ? ( t e a c h e r t r y i n g t o w i n an a r g ument w i t h s c h o o l t r u s t e e ? ? ? ) . What do you know a b o u t s c h o o l s t h e n ? ( s m a l l , one room, one t e a c h e r ) . The a r t i s t has c r e a t e d a s e n s e o f drama by u s i n g c h i a r o s c u r o . Do you r e c a l l what t h a t i s ( c o n t r a s t between l i g h t and d a r k ) . NEXT SLIDE SLIDE #9A SLIDE #9B ( H a r r i s , F a t h e r s o f C o n f e d e r a t i o n , a s t u d y , 1884) (Photo, M e e t i n g o f t h e F i r s t M i n i s t e r s , 1981) I n t h e e a r l y p a r t o f o u r h i s t o r y , Canada was g o v e r n e d by c o u n t r i e s i n E u r o p e ; f i r s t F r a n c e and t h e n E n g l a n d . E v e n t u a l l y Canada s t a r t e d t o work t o w a r d s e t t i n g up i t s own g o v e r n m e n t . I n 1867, t h e w a i t p a i d o f f and B r i t a i n g a v e Canada t h e r i g h t t o i t s own g o v e r n m e n t . We c a l l t h i s " c o n f e d e r a t i o n " and t h i s p a i n t i n g shows t h e men who wanted t o e s t a b l i s h C a n a da's f i r s t . . . 9 - 9 - 2 3 2 constitution - the Fathers of Confederation. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Discuss the following questions: - What was confederation? - Who are these people? - Who i s the most important person i n t h i s event? How can you t e l l ? - What does the setting t e l l about the event? ( i . e . windows - t a l l , arched, r i c h colours, elegant furniture, size of room, amount of setting shown). - Do you suppose that this i s what the event a c t u a l l y looked like? - Why do you suppose the a r t i s t was commissioned for t h i s painting? In 1981, the f i n a l stages of confederation took place with the bringing of the c o n s t i t u t i o n to Canada from B r i t a i n . The men in t h i s photograph are the p r o v i n c i a l premiers who brought this about. When Harris's painting of the Fathers of Con- federation was painted, the photograph was not yet a popular means of recording events. Today, we get most of our ideas about how special events looked from photographs and newspapers and magazines as well as t e l e v i s i o n coverage. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: Compare this photo to formal painting ( i . e . poses with tea cups; informal background - l i t t l e indicated; arrange- ment of people, where i s Trudeau? Furniture, clothing - business suits - not special as i n painting). N.B. people caught i n a casual moment rather than posed and positioned as i s necessary for painting (i.e sketches of each person, arrangement etc) - photo could not be used as reference for painting - a kind of sketch. ACTIVITY: Arrange the group for a class p o r t r a i t with a polaroid camera, discussing and rearrang- ing to explore: the e f f e c t of d i f f e r e n t . . . 10 - 10 - 233 r a t i o s of background to people, i . e . lower half of painting occupied by people, upper two thirds by background; d i f f e r e n t settings, poses of people, accessories; placement of people to show importance. How best could a l l of t h i s be arranged to give a true im- pression of the group? NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Varley, Vera, 1930, o i l on canvas) #10A SLIDE (Varley, Vincent Massey, 1920, o i l on canvas, 119.4 X 142.2 cm) #10B In the twentieth century, art in Canada has progressed immensely. A r t i s t s now have a r t schools i n Canada as well as easier access to the U.S. and Europe. A r t i s t s also have much more opportunity through t r a v e l and publications to communicate with each other about th e i r work and ideas. As a r e s u l t , they could share ideas and also t r y out new ideas of th e i r own. Because many a r t i s t s now paint f i r s t and then worry about s e l l i n g the work, they are generally less concerned with producing what the buyers request. Frederick Varley was famous i n the 1920's and 3 0's for his por- t r a i t s . In the past, a r t i s t s doing p o r t r a i t s usually t r i e d to achieve an almost photographic attention to d e t a i l and used colour much as they saw i t i n r e a l l i f e . A r t i s t s such as Varley now f e l t a freedom to use colour to express their feelings about the personality of the subject. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Why do you suppose he chose these colours? Can you pick out a l l of the colours he used i n the skin? Why did he use them? ( r e f l e c t i v e , expression). How would you describe the way the a r t i s t applies the paint? ( i . e . large brush, l o t s of paint, big strokes - makes the p o r t r a i t free and strong.) Now squint at the painting. How does i t look? (more photographic). 11 - 11 - 234 This p o r t r a i t , "Vera" i s of an ordinary person, no one famous. The other p o r t r a i t i s of Vincent Massey, a Governor General. How does i t d i f f e r from the.informal p o r t r a i t of Vera? (i.e . s t i f f pose, less freedom of brush work, more sober clothing and colours). NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (slide of photo p o r t r a i t ; Karsch, Robert Borden, 1933) *"'""'"B Sir Robert Borden, the subject of th i s photograph, was Canada's prime minister during the f i r s t World War. This photo was taken i n 1933 when he was enjoying his retirement. The photo- grapher, Josef Karsch, i s famous for his p o r t r a i t s of well known Canadians. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: What does the photograph t e l l you about this man's personality? Would i t say more i n colour? How might a painter paint this man? i . e . what colours? What features would be emphasized? NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Miller B r i t t a i n , Longshoremen, 1940, o i l on masonite, 120X25 in.) #11A SLIDE (Miller B r i t t a i n , Rummage Sale, 1940, o i l on masonite, 63.5X50.8cm) The depression years i n Canada, the 1930's, meant hard times for many. Jobs and money were scarce. People had to f i g h t for work and learn ways to stretch what l i t t l e money they could get so that the families had food and clothing. M i l l e r B r i t t a i n was a B.C. a r t i s t who did many paintings about that part of our history. The people i n the painting are Long- shoremen.. In the depression a Longshoreman would go down to the dockyards each morning and wait with hundreds of others u n t i l the employers came out and announced how many men he needed to work that day. Everyone else would then leave and hope for better luck the next day, or the next. . . #12B 12 - 12 - 235 INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: What story do the faces of the waiting men t e l l you? How do their faces t e l l these stories? Rummage sales became very popular i n the depression. What i s a rummage sale? Have you ever been to one? Do you remember what i t was l i k e ? What has the a r t i s t done to give the f e e l i n g of a crowded, hectic rummage sale? What kind of l i n e s do you see - 'curved.' What sort of colours are used? (deep, warm reds and orange.) How are the figures placed into the picture? (crowded, overlapped, p a r t l y i n and out of the picture - makes i t look l i k e move- ment) . The way the a r t i s t arranges things i n the painting i s c a l l e d composition. Have we seen the sort of composition i n the rummage sale before? (no, usually everything i s com- p l e t e l y i n the frame i . e . s l i d e 13B - Harris, Meeting of the School Trustees). NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Charles Comfort, The H i t l e r Line, 1948) #12A SLIDE (Charles Comfort, Young Canadian, 1942, watercolour, 90.2X105.4cm) # 1 4R In the early 1940's Canada participated i n World War II to support B r i t a i n ' s war against the Germans who were lead by Adolf H i t l e r . The war took place i n Europe, so young Canadian men found themselves fi g h t i n g a war far away from home i n countries that look very d i f f e r e n t from Canada and where d i f f e r e n t languages were spoken. For these men i t was a lonely, frightening time, l i v i n g isolated from home and seeing death and destruction a l l around them. However, the war provided jobs for people whose i n t e r e s t was recording events and providing news about the war f o r the c i v i l i a n s or servicemen. .13 - 13 - 236 Newspaper j o u r n a l i s t s , photographers, f i l m makers and r a d i o b r o a d c a s t e r s were a l l working behind the scenes and a t the b a t t l e f r o n t s . Among these people were war a r t i s t s . These a r t i s t s were h i r e d to r e c o r d scenes of the war and t r y to express peoples' emotions about war. Most of them worked i n p e n c i l sketches and small water c o l o u r p a i n t i n g s on the spot. Some of these were l a t e r turned i n t o o i l p a i n t i n g s i n t h e i r s t u d i o s . The p o r t r a i t i n t h i s p a i r of p a i n t i n g s by C h a r l e s Comfort i s of another war a r t i s t , C a r l S h a e f f e r , s i t t i n g with h i s p a i n t box i n the midst of b a t t l e . What does the f a c e t e l l you about how he f e l t ? What does the way he i s s i t t i n g t e l l you? The a r t i s t has used v e r y few c o l o u r s - j u s t browns and a l i t t l e d u l l blue. When an a r t i s t l i m i t s the c o l o u r s he uses to d i f f e r e n t shades of one c o l o u r , f o r example l i g h t , medium and dark brown, we c a l l i t a 'monochromatic' c o l o u r scheme. T h i s way of u s i n g c o l o u r g i v e s a very sombre e f f e c t and looks q u i t e u n n a t u r a l . What a good way to show the f e e l i n g of war! The a r t i s t has a l s o used l i g h t to emphasize t h i s u n n a t u r a l f e e l i n g . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Where does the l i g h t f a l l ? (hands and f a c e ) . Why do you t h i n k l i g h t has been used to emphasize hands and face? (they j u s t hang, they have heavy l i n e s , they look t i r e d , heavy and hard- worked) . The other p a i n t i n g , Comfort's " H i t l e r L i n e " shows s o l d i e r s i n the midst of b a t t l e . The c o l o u r s used f o r t h i s p a i n t i n g are monochro- matic again, except f o r the reds. Why do you suppose he chose those c o l o u r s ? (the monochro- matics make the reds stand out and look v e r y s t a r t l i n g ) . What do the reds r e p r e s e n t ? (blood, c o l o u r of bombs), i n your rmind's eye take away the fence p i e c e s a t the f r o n t of the p a i n t i n g . Is the p a i n t i n g as e f f e c t i v e , i s i t - 14 - 237 as s t a r t l i n g , without them? The a r t i s t has used the fence to create a diagonal i n the composition. A diagonal i s a l i n e that divides the picture on an angle (as opposed to those on the horizontal -across, or vertical-up and down). This diagonal upsets our sense of order and makes us uneasy because we want to straighten i t . A r t i s t s make use of diagonals when they want their paintings to be dramatic and disturbing. NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (West, Death of Wolfe, 1770, o i l on canvas, 59h X 84 in.) #13A A r t i s t s i n former wars painted their work mostly i n studios and wanted to show how noble war was. Compare thi s "Death of Wolfe," i n the War of 1812 to Comfort's p o r t r a i t . Comfort's generation of a r t i s t s were more interested i n portraying the r e a l i t i e s of war for the public. NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Hughes, American and Canadian Troops, Medupat Main Post #14A Exchange, Kiska, Alaska, 1944, o i l on canvas) Since W.W.II much has happened to change the Canadian way of l i f e . Rapid advances i n technology - t e l e v i s i o n , f i l m , computers and fas t , convenient transportation - have enabled us to see the l i f e s t y l e s of other people. To a ce r t a i n ex- tent, these factors have relieved the a r t i s t of having to re- cord fact, and thereby have l e f t him free to use his imagin- ation, r e s u l t i n g i n more personal expression. NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (William Kurelek, Women Feeding the Threshing Gang, a c r y l i c #15A on board, 61 X 74.9 cm) William Kurelek i s an a r t i s t whose work you may have seen i n books or magazines. He has been painting since the 1950's. His scenes of country l i f e are quite popular and often seen reproduced i n books. The good quality of reproduction now available i n books allows a l l of us to enjoy works of art from museums and ar t g a l l e r i e s around the world. - 15 - 238 SLIDE #15B SLIDE #16A SLIDE #16B (Cruikshank, Breaking Road) L i f e has not changed much from Cruikshank's day. Kurelek's p a i n t i n g of women pr e p a r i n g to feed the t h r e s h i n g gang shows a s e t t i n g t h a t i s s t i l l i s o l a t e d and g r e a t l y a f f e c t e d by the weather. The women are c a r r y i n g out a t r a d i t i o n t h a t has been a p a r t of ha r v e s t f o r hundreds of y e a r s . What i s d i f f e r e n t about these two p a i n t i n g s i s the s t y l e i n which the a r t i s t s have chosen to p a i n t these scenes of r u r a l l i f e ? You w i l l r e c a l l t h a t i n Cruikshank*s time, a r t i s t s were o f t e n t r a i n e d i n European t r a d i t i o n and d i d p a i n t i n g s t h a t looked very s i m i l a r to European p a i n t i n g s . Kurelek has developed a s t y l e which i s much more 'Canadian;" a s t y l e he f e e l s i s more e x p r e s s i v e of Canadian r u r a l l i f e . Can you see some d i f f e r e n c e s i n how these people p a i n t ? K u r e lek's work i s done i n a simpler s t y l e - i t looks more l i k e i t was p a i n t e d by an amateur, perhaps a r e a l farmer. He does t h i s on pur- pose to make the p a i n t i n g seeem more a u t h e n t i c . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: How do the two compositions compare? How are they arranged? Which i s simpler? NEXT SLIDE (Kurelek, photo of the a r t i s t ) (Kurelek, S e l f - p o r t r a i t , 1957) These are both p i c t u r e s of the a r t i s t W i l l i a m Kurelek. One i s a photograph and the other i s a s e l f - p o r t r a i t ; the a r t i s t ' s p a i n t i n g of h i m s e l f . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Which t e l l s more about the person? Why? Look c a r e f u l l y a t the background. What does each show? Why do you suppose Kurelek chose to p a i n t the background he uses? Can you see something wrong i n the photo of Kurelek? (he i s ' p a i n t i n g ' an a l r e a d y framed p i c t u r e ! ) . 16 - 16 - 239 NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Snow, Test Focus Figure, 1965, o i l on canvas, 152.4 X 203.2 cm) #17A SLIDE (Blank) ^ 7 B In the 1960's and 1970's many Canadians began to f e e l that because businesses were getting to be so large, c i t i e s so enormous and everything computerized, the i n d i v i d u a l was becoming less and less important to the people i n power and society as a whole. This painting by Michael Snow uses the figure of a woman as a part of a pattern. She i s not a part- i c u l a r person but could be any woman from the 1960's - she has a t y p i c a l 60's h a i r s t y l e and dress. The a r t i s t uses her not as a portrayal of people or of a personality but as a shape to be used to explore arrangements of colour and pattern. By using the human figure just as a shape i n a pattern, the a r t i s t expresses the impression of many that the i n d i v i d u a l was no longer important i n our society. NEXT SLIDE SLIDE (Danby, At the Crease, 1972, egg tempera on board, 28 X 40 in.) #18A SLIDE (Ronald, Helen, 1972, o i l on canvas, 198.5 X 152.5 cm) # 18 B Much of Canadian art today i s painted i n a sty l e that we c a l l 'realism' or 'magic realism.' Many a r t i s t s experimented for years with d i f f e r e n t styles of abstract painting, which con- fused the public because i t did not look l i k e anything they had seen before. (Abstract art does not have a r e a l i s t i c subject that we can recognize-it relys on the basic elements of art - colour, shape, lines etc. - to make a f i n i s h e d comp- osition) . For many people, r e a l i s t i c art, l i k e t h i s painting of a goalie by Ken Danby, i s something that i s easier to under- stand. By concentrating on painting so much d e t a i l , the a r t i s t has created something that looks very much l i k e a photograph. In fact, i t looks almost more r e a l i s t i c than a photograph. 17 - 17 - 2k0 INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Does t h i s p a i n t i n g communicate much f e e l i n g o r e m o t i o n t o you? The pose i s t e n s e ; you c a n i m a g i n e how t h i s g o a l i e must f e e l , e s p e c i a l l y i f you you have e v e r p l a y e d h o c k e y . Do you t h i n k t h i s i s a p a r t i c u l a r h o c k e y p l a y e r o r i s he a f i g u r e t h a t r e p r e s e n t s a l l g o a l i e s ? Many o f u s p l a y some k i n d o f s p o r t , so i t i s e a s y f o r us t o i m a g i n e o u r s e l v e s i n t h i s a t h l e t e ' s p l a c e . NEXT SLIDE SLIDE #19B ( H a i d a , human f a c e mask, wood and p a i n t ) ( r e p e a t ) The g o a l i e i s w e a r i n g a mask t h a t h i d e s h i s f a c e and c o n - s e q u e n t l y h i d e s h i s i n d i v i d u a l i t y , as d i d t h e mask f o r t h e I n d i a n who wore i t i n ceremony. L i k e t h e I n d i a n mask, t h e g o a l i e mask i s s t y l i z e d and r e p r e s e n t s a c h a r a c t e r , a g o a l i e . The f o r m t h e mask t a k e s i s d i c t a t e d by how i t i s t o be u s e d and by t h e way o t h e r s i m i l a r masks l o o k e d . The h o c k e y mask i s m o s t l y meant f o r p r o t e c t i o n b u t a t t h e same t i m e i t h i d e s t h e p e r s o n ' s f a c e , t h e r e b y h i d i n g t h e c l u e s we u s u a l l y u s e t o f i g u r e o u t what t h e i n d i v i d u a l l o o k s l i k e . U s e d i n a p a i n t i n g , i t makes t h e s c e n e v e r y i m p e r s o n a l . SLIDE #1 SLIDE #2 S t u d i o A c t i v i t y I n t r o d u c t i o n F a c e s o f p e o p l e have a l w a y s been a p o p u l a r s u b j e c t f o r a r t i s t s i n Canada and a r o u n d t h e w o r l d . ( F r e r e L u c , M o n s i g n e u r de L a v a l , 1671-72) O r i g i n a l l y t h e a r t i s t t r i e d t o u s e t h e p o r t r a i t t o show us what a p e r s o n ' s f e a t u r e s l o o k e d l i k e , what h i s p o s i t i o n o r j o b was, and p e r h a p s what h i s p e r s o n a l i t y was l i k e . The p o r t r a i t s l o o k e d q u i t e r e a l i s t i c and r e c o g n i z a b l e . ( P e l l a n , Type de l a Rue S a i n t L a u r e n t , 1941) I n r e c e n t y e a r s , a r t i s t s became l e s s c o n c e r n e d w i t h e x a c t l y what t h e i n d i v i d u a l l o o k e d l i k e and more c o n c e r n e d w i t h e x - - 18 - 241 pressing their thoughts about the indi v i d u a l ' s personality. This p o r t r a i t i s c a l l e d 'Type de l a Rue Saint Laurent' i n other words, a t y p i c a l person on St. Laurence Street. The a r t i s t has chosen colours, shapes and d e t a i l s that he thinks represent that type of person, i . e . fedora hat, flashing striped jacket, straight hair and angular face. The a r t i s t i s also exploring how the painting works as a composition - how the l i n e s , colours and shapes can be ar- ranged for the best e f f e c t . SLIDE (Claude Breeze, Faces #2, 1967) This painting i s merely c a l l e d Faces #2. There are some things we can fi n d i n i t that represent f a c i a l features, teeth, noses, eyes, ears, but these are rearranged and coloured i n a very unusual way. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Why do you suppose this might be? (e.g. using f a c i a l features as part of the design, record most measurable features of the face, express confusion). A r t i s t s i n the past few decades have experimented with some- thing c a l l e d 'abstraction.' This means that the a r t i s t i s moving away from painting things as they looked. Instead, he uses ideas about colours, shapes, patterns or compositions. SLIDE (Leslie Poole, Personal P o r t r a i t , Nov. 7, 1978, A c r y l i c on canvas) This painting by Vancouver a r t i s t L e s l i e Poole i s c a l l e d 'Personal P o r t r a i t . * The painting i s i n two halves - both sides are abstract but one i s much more abstract than the other. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: What does the painting t e l l you about Mr. Poole? ( i . e . his choice of colours, his personality, what he looks like) 19 - 19 - 242 cm ( W i l l i a m R o n a l d , H e l e n , 1972, o i l on c a n v a s , 198.5 X 152.5 Do you remember t h i s p a i n t i n g ? T h i s p a i n t i n g i s c a l l e d ' H e l e n . INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Can you f i n d a woman i n i t ? What t h i n g s a b o u t t h e p a i n t i n g t e l l you i t i s a b o u t a woman? ( c o l o u r s - p i n k r e p r e s e n t s ' g i r l s ' - s o f t c o l o u r s , r o u n d s h a p e s - womanly). How m i g h t i t be changed t o be a b o u t a man? ( J . H u r t u b i s e , K a t h e r i n e , 1967, o i l on c a n v a s , 173 X 173 cm) T h i s s l i d e i s o f a p a i n t i n g , b u t what o t h e r o b j e c t does i t l o o k l i k e ? (a q u i l t ) . The a r i t s t c a l l s t h e p a i n t i n g ' K a t h e r i n e INSTRUCTOR NOTE: DISCUSSION: Why m i g h t he have c h o s e n t h i s p a t t e r n t o r e p r e s e n t ' K a t h e r i n e 1 ? What d o e s i t t e l l you a b o u t h e r ? To r e v i e w : When an a r t i s t d o e s a p a i n t i n g of a p e r s o n he has t o t h i n k a b o u t : 1) what t h e p e r s o n l o o k s l i k e 2) what a p e r s o n ' s p e r s o n a l i t y i s l i k e T h e n he h a s t o t h i n k a b o u t ways o f showing t h e s e w i t h t h e e l e m e n t s o f d e s i g n l i k e c o l o u r and shape and how he combines t h e s e e l e m e n t s i n t o a c o m p o s i t i o n . STUDIO PROJECT ( L e s l i e P o o l e , P e r s o n a l P o r t r a i t ) F o r our p r o j e c t we a r e g o i n g t o do " s e l f p o r t r a i t s " - e a c h o f us w i l l do a p o r t r a i t 'about' h i m s e l f . We w i l l n o t be w o r r i e d a b o u t t h e d e t a i l s o f how we l o o k ; l i t t l e c u r l s i n o u r h a i r o r f r e c k l e s on o u r f a c e , b u t we w i l l want t o show b a s i c a l l y what we l o o k l i k e a nd s o m e t h i n g a b o u t our p e r s o n a l i t y , p e r h a p s t h e mood we a r e i n r i g h t now. • M a t e r i a l s : - c o l o u r e d t i s s u e p a p e r and c o n s t r u c t i o n p a p e r - g l u e - p a p e r f o r s u p p o r t o f c o l l a g e i . e . l i g h t c a r d , w h i t e c o n s t r u c t i o n p a p e r . . . 20 - 2D - 243 Materials: v - scrap paper for planning - pencils for planning only • Steps: Planning - Use a p e n c i l and scrap paper to plan the basic composition of your p o r t r a i t . You might divide your paper into two compositions l i k e Poole did. Use these questions to help you plan your p o r t r a i t : How big i s the nose? What i s your basic hair style? What are your ears l i k e ? For clues, use the mirrors and f e e l your face. Remember, just do your head and shoulders. Next, pick out the colours you want to use. The colours you use shouldn't be f a c t u a l but should t e l l about your personality. You might want lo t s of colour or you might want to use monochromes ( i . e . a l l shades of one colour). Doing: A) Gather together your materials for your p o r t r a i t . You w i l l need: 1) a piece of card or heavy paper 2) the colours of tissue and construction paper you need. 3) glue B) L i g h t l y sketch your design on the card, using your sketch as a guide. C) Tear out the coloured paper i n the shapes you need for your p o r t r a i t . No scissors! I Remember that you can over- lap the tissue for more colours. You can also f o l d and c r i n k l e the paper for some intere s t i n g textures. When you are finished, we w i l l have a look at a l l of the s e l f - p o r t r a i t s to see how well you have done. 244 SURREY ART GALLERY: SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART WORKSHOP SLIDE LIST: F o l l o w i n g a r e s l i d e s l i s t e d i n o r d e r of t h e i r p r e s e n t a t i o n . I f two p r o j e c t o r s a r e used, A = p r o j e c t o r A; B = p r o j e c t o r B 1. 1-A Haida mask, human f a c e , wood and p a i n t 2. 1-B Thebes, L a d i e s and M u s i c i a n s , tomb p a i n t i n g , c. 1400 B.C. 3. 2-A F r e r e Luc, F r a n c e B r i n g i n g t h e . F a i t h , 1671, o i l on canvas, 218.4 X 218.4 cm. 4. 2-B Claude L o r r a i n , P a s t o r a l Landscape, 17th C., o i l on canvas, 40 X 42% i n . 5. 3-A F r e r e Luc, Monsigneur de L a v a l , 1671-72, o i l on canvas 6. 3-B Anonymous, P o r t r a i t of Mere Jeanne F r a n c o i s e , 168 4, o i l on canvas, 71.1 X 58.4 cm 7. 4-A Anonymous, V o t i v e of Mme. R i v e r i n , 17 03, o i l on canvas, 4 0 X 5 2 cm 8. 4-B Anonymous, V o t i v e of Three Castaways, c. 1754, o i l on board, 12% X 20 i n . 9. 5-A P a u l Kane, I n d i a n s P l a y i n g a t A l c o l o h , c. 1851-6, o i l on canvas, 18 X 29 i n . 10. 5-B P a u l Kane, s k e t c h e s from h i s notebook, c. 1850 11. 6-B Gainsborough, The B a i l l i e F a m i l y , 1784, o i l on canvas, 99 X 90 i n . 12. 6-A W i l l i a m B e r c z y , Joseph B r a n t , 1797 13. 7-A C o r n e l i u s K r i e g h o f f , H a b i t a n t s ' C a b i n , 1850's o i l on canvas 14. 7-B W i l l i a m C r u i k s h a n k , B r e a k i n g Road, 1894, o i l on canvas, 88.9 X 172.7 cm. 15. 8-A C o r n e l i u s K r i e g h o f f , J.B. J o l i f o u , A u b e r g e r , 1871, o i l on canvas 16. 8-B Ro b e r t H a r r i s , M e e t i n g of the S c h o o l T r u s t e e s , 1885, o i l on canvas 17. 9-A R o b e r t H a r r i s , F a t h e r s of C o n f e d e r a t i o n , a s t u d y , 1884 18. 9-B Photo: Bob Cooper, F i r s t M i n i s t e r s , 1981 19. 10-A F r e d e r i c k V a r l e y , V e r a , 1930, o i l on canvas 20. 10-B F r e d e r i c k V a r l e y , V i n c e n t Massey, 1920, o i l on canvas, 119.4 x 142.2 cm. 21. 11-B K a r s c h , R o b e r t Borden, 1933, photograph . . ./2 245 S l i d e L i s t - Page 2 22. 12-B M i l l e r B r i t t a i n , The Rummage S a l e , 1940, o i l on m a s o n i t e , 63.5 x 50.8 cm. 23. 11-A M i l l e r B r i t t a i n , Longshoremen, 1940, o i l on m a s o n i t e , 20 x 25 i n . 24. 13-B R o b e r t H a r r i s , M e e t i n g o f t h e S c h o o l T r u s t e e s . 1885. 25. 12-A C h a r l e s C o m f o r t , The H i t l e r L i n e , 1948, o i l on c a n v a s 26. 14-B C h a r l e s C o m f o r t , Young C a n a d i a n , 1942, w a t e r c o l o u r , 90.2 X 105.4 cm 27. 13-A B e n j a m i n West, D e a t h o f W o l f e , 1770, o i l on c a n v a s , 59h X 84 i n . 28. 14-A E . J . Hughes, A m e r i c a n and C a n a d i a n T r o o p s , Medupat M a i n P o s t E x c h a n g e , K i s k a , A l a s k a , 1944, o i l on c a n v a s , 40 X 48 i n . 29. 15-A W i l l i a m K u r e l e k , Women F e e d i n g t h e T h r e s h i n g Gang. a c r y l i c on b o a r d , 61 X 74.9 cm. 30. 15-B W i l l i a m C r u i k s h a n k , B r e a k i n g Road 31. 16-A W i l l i a m K u r e l e k , p h o t o o f t h e a r t i s t , f r o m : t h e V a n c o u v e r Sun, Weekend, v o l . 24, #27, p.8. 32. 16-B W i l l i a m K u r e l e k , S e l f P o r t r a i t , 1957 33. 17-A M i c h a e l Snow, T e s t . F o c u s F i e l d F i g u r e , 1965, o i l on c a n v a s , 152.4 X 203.2 cm. 34. 17-B B l a n k 35. 18-A Ken Danby, A t t h e C r e a s e , 1972, egg tempera on b o a r d , 28 X 40 i n . 36. 18-B W i l l i a m R o n a l d , H e l e n , 1972, o i l on c a n v a s , 198.5 X 152.5 cm. 37. 19-B H a i d a mask, human f a c e , wood and p a i n t . STUDIO ACTIVITY INTRODUCTION SLIDES: 1. F r e r e L u c , M o n s i g n e u r de L a v a l , 1671-72 2. A l f r e d P e l l a n , Type de l a Rue S a i n t L a u r e n t , 1941 3. C l a u d e B r e e z e , F a c e s #2, 1967 4. L e s l i e P o o l e , P e r s o n a l P o r t r a i t , Nov. 7. 1978, a c r y l i c on c a n v a s 5. W i l l i a m R o n a l d , H e l e n , 1972, o i l on c a n v a s , 198.5 X 152.5 cm. 6. J . H u r t u b i s e , K a t h e r i n e , 1967, o i l on c a n v a s , 173 X 173 cm.   248 249 APPENDIX 10 2 5 0 SURREY ART GALLERY: SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART WORKSHOP Follow-up A c t i v i t i e s : Teacher Note: A f t e r your v i s i t to the Surrey Art G a l l e r y f o r the "Seeing Ourselves Through A r t " workshop, you might want to do one of these follow-up a c t i v i t i e s with your c l a s s : 1) P a i n t i n g s of everyday l i f e are c a l l e d "Genre" p a i n t i n g s . Have your c l a s s do p a i n t i n g s or c o l o u r e d drawings t h a t i l l u s t r a t e t h e i r everyday l i f e - o r d i n a r y people, doing f a m i l i a r a c t i v i t i e s . R e c a l l the work of Kurelek, K r e i g h o f f , or Robert H a r r i s that was shown in the workshop. 2) A v i s u a l notebook: One of the things that we n o t i c e d about the p a i n t i n g s we saw i n the workshop i s that o f t e n they r e f l e c t the s p i r i t and environment of the times i n which they were p a i n t e d . Have the students compile a scrapbook of " v i s u a l " items which become meaningful or s i g n i f i c a n t because of t h e i r arrangement or simply because the student thought the item important enough to keep. The items should be found r a t h e r than j u s t c l i p p e d from a v a i l a b l e p e r i o d i c a l s . . . i . e . , p r i n t e d wrappers, menus, packaging, envelopes, o l d n e g a t i v e s , t i c k e t stubs . . . The idea of the notebook i s to c r e a t e a s o r t of "time c a p s u l e " that might be found by someone 100 years from now. S t r e s s the idea of using a theme to u n i f y the p r o j e c t and choosing o b j e c t s that r e f l e c t contemporary times. 3) Face of our times: Choose a photograph of the face of a p u b l i c f i g u r e of our times, ( p r e f e r a b l y a Canadian) and cut i t up i n t o squares, one square per c l a s s member. S h u f f l e the squares and d i s t r i b u t e them to students, who w i l l , using markers, draw an enlarged v e r s i o n of t h e i r s e c t i o n on a p i e c e of paper at l e a s t 12" x 12". Reassemble the "photograph" on the w a l l to c r e a t e a "fa c e mural" of your c h a r a c t e r . M0880 2 5 1 APPENDIX 11    APPENDIX 12 256 TEACHER EVALUATION OF PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT I = INUIT S = SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART In order to produce materials that will be of maximum use to you, we would like your input. Your evaluation of the materials that you have just used with your class will be most appreciated by those preparing out ki ts. Please answer the following questions: NAME: SCHOOL: GRADES USING THE MATERIALS: Grade 4 Grade 5 Grade 6 & 7 Grade 7 TOTAI Grade 4 Grade 5 Grade 6 Grade 7 TOTAL 1 3 •1 1. WHICH KIT HAVE YOU JUST USED? INUIT SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART Questionnaires: - completed - 4 - not completed - 1 - not used - 1 returned - 3 kit not sent - 1 kit not used - 1 2. DO YOU HAVE A BACKGROUND IN THE SUBJECT COVERED IN THE KIT? I - l i t t l e - 2 S - yes - 2 - no - 1 3. DO YOU HAVE AN ART BACKGROUND? I - l i t t l e - 2 - none - 2 S - yes (limited) - 2 - no - 1 WOULD YOU NORMALLY DO A PREPARATORY LESSON WITH YOUR CLASS BEFORE VISITING AN ART GALLERY IF YOU HAD NOT BEEN SENT THE MATERIALS? I S - yes no IF YES WHAT FORM WOULD THAT LESSON TAKE? I - information & discussion, film, pictures S - Same as per I. - general information about an art gallery 257 WOULD YOU HAVE REQUESTED THIS KIT HAD IT NOT BEEN AUTOMATICALLY SENT TO YOU UPON BOOKING YOUR WORKSHOP? I - yes - 2 - no - 1 ( 1 wouldn't have expected there to be one) S - yes DO YOU THINK IT IS A GOOD IDEA TO DO A PREPARATORY LESSON? WHY? I - yes - 4 S - yes - 3 -provides tie between school and gallery WERE YOU CLEAR AS TO WHAT YOUR VISIT TO THE SURREY ART GALLRY WOULD ENTAIL? I - yes - 4 S - yes - 3 DID YOU ENJOY THIS PREPARATORY KIT? I - yes - 4 S - yes - 3 DID YOUR CLASS ENJOY THE PRESENTATION? I - yes - 4 S - yes - 3 DID YOU USE ALL OF THE MATERIALS INCLUDED IN THE KIT, I.E. SLIDES, TAPE, COMMENTARY, ACTIVITY SHEETS? I - yes - 4 (but not tapes) S - yes - 3 (except tape for 2) CHECK OFF THE APPROPRIATE COMMENTS ABOUT THIS KIT: (PLEASE FEEL FREE TO ADD COMMENTS) I Length: I too long too short 1 good length Vocabulary: too dif f icult too simplistic 3 appropriate Detail 1 too detailed Instructions 4 too sketch For Use: 2 appropriate 3 clear too detailed too sketchy confusing 258 Material Presented: Activity Sheets: I S I S boring 3 _3_ enjoyable 4 J _ _ interesting _ unnecessary 2 J _ _ appropriate _ inappropriate 3 _3_ _ helpful 2 J _ helped peak student 4 _3_ _ relevant to curriculum interest in their 2 J _ enhancing to curriculum gallery visi t not relevant to curriculum but valuable addition to program 12. YOUR COMMENTS AND/OR SUGGESTIONS: I_ - you do a good jobl _S - very helpful; good kits - covenient to use information not available - more slides per comment - more 'art type' activities - more 'art' activities - less vocabulary 13. YOUR STUDENTS' COMMENTS AND/OR SUGGESTIONS: I - See letters in next Appendix APPENDIX 13 f 260 TEACHER EVALUATION OF "AT THE GALLERY WORKSHOP" I = INUIT S = SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART We would greatly appreciate your help in evaluating our programs so that we can design them to your maximum benefit. Please answer the following questions: NAME: SCHOOL: GRADES: WORKSHOP ATTENDED: INUIT: ARTS & CULTURE / SEEING OURSELVES THROUGH ART Evaluation: Completed: 5 Completed: 5 Incomplete: 1 1. WAS THE PRE-VISIT PREPARATORY KIT THAT WE SENT YOU, A HELPFUL INTRODUCTION TO THE WORKSHOP AT THE GALLERY? I - yes - 4 S - yes - 3 - no - 1 (not received) - not used - 1 DID IT HELP MAKE YOUR CLASS MORE RECEPTIVE TO THE WORKSHOP? I - yes - 4 S - yes - 3 2. DID YOUR CLASS ENJOY THE WORKSHOP? I - yes - 5 S - yes - 5 3. WAS THE MATERIAL COVERED NEW TO THEM? I - yes - 2 S - yes - 2 - partially - 3 - partially - 3 4. WAS YOUR CLASS FAMILIAR WITH THE STUDIO TECHNIQUE USED IN THE PRODUCTION PART OF THE WORKSHOP? I - yes - S - yes - 4 - some - 3 - no - 1 - no - 2 261 5. DOES YOUR CLASS HAVE ART REGULARLY AT SCHOOL? I - yes - 4 - no - 1 (irregularly) yes no 4 1 6. DID THE WORKSHOP ENHANCE YOUR REGULAR ART PROGRAM? I - yes - 5 S - yes - 5 7. WHY DID YOU SCHEDULE THIS VISIT FOR YOUR CLASS? required by school district required by school 4 4 initiated by you 4 2 relevant to classroom studies this year 4 4 seemed like a valuable experience for your class other 8. DO YOU LIKE THE FORMAT OF OUR WORKSHOPS? I - yes - 3 - more student participation - 2 S - yes - 5 9. WHAT IMPROVEMENTS COULD WE MAKE TO THE PRESENTATIONS? LENGTH: 2 - more time for pri nt- making shorter si i de selection 2 - good FOCUS: I i 2 - good CONTENT: LANGUAGE: 3 - good 4 - good PRESENTATION: good I - comments: - 'good the way i t is ' S - slide presentation - 'happy with i t as is ' excellent - break up slide section 262 10. WOULD YOU USE CLASSROOM FOLLOW-UP SUGGESTIONS? 1 I - yes - 4 - sometimes S - yes - 4 - sometimes 1 11. WHAT TOPICS WOULD YOU LIKE TO SEE COVERED IN THIS WORKSHOP FORMAT? S I - 2 - Group 7 1 - Indian printmaking day (already offered) - Indian 12. WOULD YOU USE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING IF THEY WERE AVAILABLE FROM US? l_ S 3 4 teacher workshops 5 4 more kits 4 3 preparation material 1 bibliography _I 4 5 classroom visits for _4_ 2 s 1 studio lesson 3 presentation similar to workshops _3_ art appreciation lessons 13. DO YOU LEARN FROM OUR WORKSHOPS? I S 1 studio ideas _3_ _4_ _3_ 2 4 ideas for how to approach art history or art appreciation topics 1 new knowledge from the content of the presentations _2_ more confidence for using art in the classroom 263 APPENDIX 14 INSTRUCTOR EVALUATION OF WORKSHOP MATERIALSt Workshop taught: sjknu^f' CuJ~ f CuXtu^. Grade l e v e l : X- (=> Number of students: Z£_ School: 1 Please comment b r i e f l y on the following aspects of the material you used: length of s c r i p t as givEn to you: a d a p t a b i l i t y of that s c r i p t f o r your s p e c i f i c group, i e ) length, langi and content: usefulness of information given: , _^ - choice of v i s u a l s : y s u i t a b i l i t y of and ins t r u c t i o n s f o r , studio p r o j e c t : student response to the workshop materials and a c t i v i t i e s : suggestions f o r future use and ammendment: INSTRUpTOR EVALUATION OF WORKSHOP MATERIALS i Workshop t a u g h t i -XfJtii t Q r K ^CultUlC _____ Grade l e v e l t 5" Number, o f s t u d e n t s i 2^" S c h o o l i JFIee\ uicc^cl P l e a s e comment b r i e f l y on the f o l l o w i n g a s p e c t s o f the m a t e r i a l you used: l e n g t h o f s c r i p t as g i v s n to you: T hciJC i . K c t k n p ^ cic -b cLcoi^odoK <?&*k G? f a c t e I out/ a d a p t a b i l i t y o f t h a t s c r i p t f o r your s p e c i f i c group} i e ) l e n g t h , lan^ and c o n t e n t : L / _ M ^df: .';,.>»J- 4t> S u i t Q \-0 6<L U ^ e L u s e f u l n e s s o f i n f o r m a t i o n g i v e n : e x c e l l e d t c h o i c e o f v i s u a l s : s u i t a b i l i t y o f and i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r , s t u d i o p r o j e c t : s t u d e n t r e s p o n s e to the workshop m a t e r i a l s and a c t i v i t i e s : s u g g e s t i o n s f o r f u t u r e use and amrnendraent: c i a c s Vso^' p r e Kir c l a c ; 4 r \ d ^ e ^ e f c r e Mlberf or 6- ar{ HAttn dosses ^ a i d»ci t>ot h o o t p r e f i t - 2 6 6 APPENDIX 15 267 268 269 APPENDIX 16

Cite

Citation Scheme:

    

Usage Statistics

Country Views Downloads
China 22 9
United States 12 0
Russia 5 0
France 3 0
Ukraine 2 0
Kenya 2 0
Sri Lanka 1 0
United Kingdom 1 0
Singapore 1 0
City Views Downloads
Beijing 19 0
Unknown 11 0
Ashburn 5 0
Washington 4 0
Guangzhou 3 0
Mykolayiv 2 0
Singapore 1 0
Boardman 1 0
Mountain View 1 0
Colwyn Bay 1 0
Barnegat 1 0

{[{ mDataHeader[type] }]} {[{ month[type] }]} {[{ tData[type] }]}

Share

Share to:

Comment

Related Items